Home

Lexmark X952de

1. s seusseeesseesennserssseesrerssresrersserssseesrerssersseeseres 298 Change papersource to Papen SZE kni A E 298 Change paper source to paper size load Orientation ssseesoseesseeeseeesserssrssserseeesssesreresereseeserrssresssrreeres 298 Change paper source to paper size paper type o snnessensseeerseennssenssssesssreessrersseerrsssresssessssressrreesssssseesss 298 Change paper source to paper size paper type load orientation cccccesecccesececeecesescceeseceeeceesess 298 CHECK tsrel orientation Oor guides ciscivleccctssntwsncvssadhidseraebienaclwaseantaeiedsvaradsisnvensnaevidediedetordedsuddasuienacucaasdeddussdedsensess 299 Close CVET D heana E EA E E E re ee eee R 299 Close door X e a a T a E 299 ISIC COM LOG enei a A OE 299 Emot EME NOlS PUNCH DOK Sonnii E A A D A A eee 299 Error reading USBdrive Remove USB rida cauperiiinen n e a E a a a 299 ETFOr redding USB NUD REMOVE DUDrrascdaeotiiyria aeaa E A 299 Fax mMer y alheio E N A E AAN 299 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator ccccccssescccssseccceesceceeeecesseesceeseaeceesaeceessaaeeeaeeeees 300 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator esssssessssssseressrerssrrreeseresssessserersreeeeeess 300 Fax Station Name Ot Set UD icc viacsanes eerren A ETET EEE EOE EENET EEEE EA eee as 300 Fax Staton NUMPer NOE SCE UD araia a a A E A 300 EA 4 eei EEEO AAE A E E sates acters 300 Contents
2. CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters 1 Unpack the optional tray and then remove all packing material 2 Place the tray near the printer 3 Turn off the printer Additional printer setup 50 4 Align the printer with the tray and then lower the printer into place 1 tray module 1 tray module 2 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder 3 tray module 3 tray module p22 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder Additional printer setup 51 Tandem tray module Tandem tray module p22 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder 5 Turn the printer back on 6 Set the printer software to recognize the optional tray For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 54 Attaching cables CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Connect the printer to the computer
3. Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations e Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos e Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other e Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer e Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer e Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film e Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine e Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper e Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press e Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the original document before it is scanned completely When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Scanning 141 Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen
4. Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selected Note Alphabetical is the factory default setting Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel Understanding printer menus 220 Job Accounting menu Note This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed The printer hard disk cannot be read write or write protected Menu item Description Job Accounting Log Determines if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives Note Off is the factory default setting On Job Accounting Utilities Lets you print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive Accounting Log Frequency Determines how often a log file is created Monthly Note Monthly is the factory default setting Weekly Log Action at End of Frequency Determines how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires None Note None is the factory default setting E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log Post Current Log Post amp Delete Current Log Disk Near Full Level Specifies the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near 1 99 Full Action Off Note 5MB is the factory default setting Disk Near Full Action Determines how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full None Notes E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log e None is the factory default s
5. Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray e Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to paper size paper type Try one or more of the following Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray e Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to paper size paper type load orientation Try one or more of the following e Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray e Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Troubleshooting 298 Check src orientation or guides Try one or more of the following e Move the paper guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded e Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper
6. 4 Keypad Lets you enter numbers letter or symbols 5 Submit Lets you submit changes made in the printer settings Stop Cancel Stops all printer activity Note A list of option is displayed once Stopped appears on the display Lets you navigate back to the home screen Learning about the printer 23 Understanding the home screen Understanding the home screen When the printer is turned on the display shows a basic screen referred to as the home screen Touch the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying faxing or scanning to open the menu screen or to respond to messages Note Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions 123 123 123 123 Copy E mail Bookmarks Fax Search A lS Gg A gt j cc f mas Page 10f3 Change Copy Held Jobs Language Shortcuts j aaa k a Status Ready Supplies AX Access the printer menus Note These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state FIP Access the File Transfer Protocol FTP menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server Status message bar e Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy Show printer conditions such as Toner Lowor Cartridge Low Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing Status Supplies Display a warning or error message whenev
7. If the port is not in the list then click Refresh or Navigate to Add port gt select a port type gt enter necessary information gt OK Click Continue 1 If you want to add another printer then click Add Another 2 Ifyou want to make changes then select a printer and then click Edit 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Click Finish 3 Set the COM port parameters Additional printer setup 64 After installing the printer driver set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver Note Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer a Open the Device Manager 1 Click or click Start and then click Run 2 Inthe Start Search or Run box type devmgmt msc 3 Press Enter or click OK Look for Ports and then click to expand the list of available ports Right click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer example COM1 Click Properties 0o a o ww On the Port Settings tab set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters in the printer Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings h Click OK and then close all the windows g Printa test page to verify printer installation Additional printer setup 65 Minimizing your printer s environmental impact Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to red
8. Logs Display Remote Fax Name or Remote Station Name Dialed Number Enable Job Log Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Speaker Settings Menu item Speaker Mode On until Connected Always On Always Off Speaker Volume High Low Description Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error Enables automatic printing of fax logs Note Logs print after every 200 fax jobs Specifies the source of the paper used for printing logs Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned Enables access to the Fax Job log Enables access to the Fax Call log Specifies the exit bin where fax logs are printed Description Specifies the mode of the speaker Notes e On until Connected is the factory default setting A sound is issued until the fax connection is made e Always On turns the speaker on e Always Off turns the speaker off Controls the volume setting Note High is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 202 A Menu item Description Ringer Volume Controls the fax speaker ringer volume Note On is the factory default setting Answer On Menu item Description All Rings Specifies ring patterns when device is answering calls Single Ring Only Note All Rings is the factory default setting Double Ring Only Triple Ring Only Single or Double R
9. Menu item Enable Fax Receive Fax Job Waiting None Toner Toner and Supplies Rings to Answer 1 25 Auto Reduction Paper Source Auto Tray x Multi Purpose Feeder Sides Duplex On Separator Sheets Off Before Job After Job Separator Sheet Source Tray x Manual Feeder Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Fax Footer On Description Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white Note On is the factory default setting Description Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer Note On is the factory default setting Removes fax jobs that request specific unavailable resources from the print queue Note None is the factory default setting Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job Note 3 is the factory default setting Scales an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source Note On is the factory default setting Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an incoming fax Enables duplex printing two sided printing for incoming fax jobs Enables the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs Specifies where the printer will pick the separator sheet Specifies an exit bin for received faxes Note Bin 1 is available only when the finisher is installed Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a receiv
10. Network Reports menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network Setup gt Reports or Network Reports Menu item Description Print Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address Network Card menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt Network Card Description View Card Status Lets you view the connection status of the Network Card Connected Disconnected View Card Speed Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card Understanding printer menus 164 A Menu item Description Network Address Lets you view the network addresses UAA LAA Job Timeout Sets the amount of time in seconds before a network print job is canceled 0 Note 90 seconds is the factory default setting 10 225 Banner Page Allows the printer to print a banner page Note Off is the factory default setting On TCP IP menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt TCP IP Note This menu is available only in network models or printers attached to print servers Menu item Description Activate Activates TCP IP Note On is t
11. Note 30 seconds is the factory default setting Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end of job message before canceling the remainder of the print job Notes e 90 seconds is the factory default setting e When the timer expires any partially printed page still in the printer is printed and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting e Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print job Notes e 40 seconds is the factory default setting e Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs Sets the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queue Notes e 30 seconds is the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time period Note Disabled is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 188 Menu item Description Print Recovery Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages Jam Recovery Auto Notes e
12. Printer configurations CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Learning about the printer 19 Basic model 7 Configured models You can configure your basic printer by adding optional trays A 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder and a finisher bin can also be added Optional 520 sheet tray Tray 2 PS Optional 520 sheet tray Tray 2 Tray 3 and Tray 4 3 Optional 520 sheet tray Tray 2 Learning about the printer 20 Optional 2 000 sheet tandem tray module 850 sheet tray Tray 3 1 150 sheet tray Tray 4 Fully configured model Finisher bin The finisher bin can either be one of the following e Standard finisher Punch Stapler Booklet finisher Punch Stapler Booklet a2 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder Basic functions of the scanner The scanner provides copy fax and scan to network capability for large workgroups You can e Make quick copies or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs e Send a fax usin
13. LEXMARK X950 Series User s Guide June 2011 Machine type s 7558 Model s 032 036 232 236 432 436 www lexmark com Contents Safety MTOR AU O N serien a ep ai LO Learning about the printer sessesssssessoessessessessoesessoesssesessoessessessessseseesse L7 Finding information about the printer ssseeesesesnseerserrsrrsressrssrrrsereresserssresrrerererrserssrosererrrseesreeserrreerene 17 SOE CLI AO Caon Or te OIC OT ra EEI ERE EEEE 18 FGM CFO U O are E T E aeuueseesecnenaee 19 Basic TUNMCUOMS OF tHE SCONE eninin ia a aana iae 21 Understanding the ADF and scanner Glass ccccsscccscccssecceececesccesececsscceucecnceeeeceenecseeceseaeeseucecneesesseees 22 Understanding the printer control panel isriiisriaiisar re RE TEE Ean 23 Understanding the home SCreen ccccccsccccssccscscsceccccccscscscccscccccsccscscscesse 24 Understanding the NOME SClEO Nl icsesteteacscrvacvawrndscenetaceeiaiessdbecennvasadediatestedsebossatatdaadedadenseaneenvietesaudomesiae 24 STC TVS TOuC S reen DOON aeaa E E etneesseneueaeee 26 Setting up and using the home screen applications cccccccccecececescscseses 29 Accessing the Embedded Web SEVEN secracsvsdaisen svesaussodvac wuradeanioaindensaneaveadaaeoasnncecnaeinonsisaaeeteduenveeatensopiinyoss 29 Showing or hiding icons on the home SCLEE N cccseccesceeseceseccenceceecencceuccceeceenceeuetseeecnceceueesueeseceseees 29 Activating the homescreen ap
14. On Sharpness 1 5 Temperature 4 to 4 Description Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Understanding printer menus 213 Flash Drive menu Scan Settings Menu item Description Format PDF pdf Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version 1 2 1 6 A la Content Type Text Photo Photo Text Graphics Content Source Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Black and White Laser Resolution 150 dpi 200 dpi
15. Shadow Detail 4to4 Scan edge to edge On Sharpness 1 5 Temperature 4 to 4 Print Settings Paper Source Tray x MP Feeder Manual Paper Manual Envelope Color Color Black Only Collate On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 Sides Duplex 1 sided 2 sided Staple Off Auto Back Dual Dual Double Front Description Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Specifies a default number of copies for each print job Note 1 is the factory default setting Sets a default paper source for all print jobs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Specifies whether copies are printed in color or black and white Note Color is the factory default setting Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Note On is the factory default setting Specifies whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page Note 1 sided
16. 10 SVS SFE TIS Nole punch OX cni a E T exnaee onindiaale E EE diealetaeleameetanstevanien 300 instal Troy DK iera AA T A T 300 Load sre With CUSTOM itype name merienenn a anand eae aoa aon aaa 301 LOA SKE With CUStom Strine eariiiri Asvadacintonacanst wand NEAN AEE EEEN EEANN EENEN NAAR ANTEPE RENET ETON 301 Load FSN Ba a SZE ee e E A E E ee 301 Load SC WIE EY DOW S122 inaen E a a 301 Load Manual Feeder with custom type NAME ccccseeseccesseecceeseececeeceeeeaeceseeescesseaeeesaaeeeeesaseeseaeeauan sees 302 Load Manual Feeder WIth CUStOni Strine ecnesisesessinseoidcaniivacatvcnaata EEEE AEA A AE AANA 302 toad Mandal Feeder With paper Size urna a a a a a 302 Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper SIZE cceeeeccssseeceesseeceeeseceeeeescesseesceeeeneeeseasesseeaseasagseees 302 Load staple Sarem teste siovabe acinus eiaveh ved a A A 302 Manual feeder expects paper size Check paper source guides nossnnessssnnsssssersssseerssserrrssssersssseeresseeeee 303 Memor TUM cannot Dnt TAKES essiri E E A NOE E EA NEE 303 POWer Off Walt 2 SCCOMAS POWET ON ao irre ao a NE EA O AE 303 Remove paper from Standard Output DIM asetse io e a TEE ENT 303 REMOVE DADSM ICOM DIN X iii E EN E O ET T E 303 Remove paper from linked set binname J esnmsnsrireenre nee a aa AARE O A 303 Remove paper ronm all DINS oracin a a E a aacaeae Te etooest 303 Restore held JODS rirorio E E OE AES 303 scanner ADF GOVE
17. 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Products equipped with 2 4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment CE Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries but is restricted to indoor use only Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative Notices 356 This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below Spole nost Lexmark International Inc t mto prohla uje ze v robek tento v robek je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rni
18. 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi 75 dpi Darkness 1 9 Orientation Portrait Landscape Specifies the format of the file to be sent through FTP Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Sets the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Specifies the content of the original document Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Specifies how the original document is produced Note Color Laser is the factory default setting Specifies whether prints are in black and white or color Note Off is the factory default setting Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch dpi Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting Lightens or darkens the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Note Portrait is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 214 A Menu item Description Original Size Specifies the paper size of the original document Letter Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default Legal setting Executive Tabloid Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3x5in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A3 A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Sides Duplex Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on a page Off Long edge Notes Short edge e Off is the factory default sett
19. Clearing jams 274 Area Areaname Jam numbers What to do Door A 201 202 Open door A and then remove the jammed paper 231 Remove all jammed paper in the fuser 281 44 Doord 208 Open door A and then door D and then remove the jammed paper 201 202 paper jams If the jammed paper is visible in the standard exit bin then firmly grasp the paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Paper jam in the fuser 1 Open door A by lifting the release latch and lowering the door A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Pull the green lever down Clearing jams 275 3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the center of the fuser unit Doing so will damage the fuser Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Push the green lever back into place 5 Close door A 6 If necessary touch Continue from the printer control panel Paper jam under the fuser 1 Open door A AN CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 If the jammed paper is visible under the fuser then firmly grasp the paper on each side and then gently pull it ou
20. Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen touch Fax 4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad To add recipients touch Next Number and then enter the recipient s telephone number or shortcut number or search the address book Note To place a dial pause within a fax number press I The dial pause appears as a comma in the Fax to box Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first 5 Touch Fax It Sending a fax using the computer The printer driver fax option allows you to print to fax where the printer will send a queued document as a fax rather than print it The fax option functions as a normal fax machine but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel 1 With a document open click File gt Print 2 Select the printer and then navigate to Properties gt Fax tab gt Enable fax 3 Enter the recipient fax number s in the Fax number s field Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature 4 f necessary enter a prefix in the Dialing prefix field 5 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation 6 If you want to include a cover page with the fax then select Include c
21. For more information on configuring 802 1X security see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD Installing the printer on a wireless network Windows Before installing the printer on a wireless network make sure e Your wireless network is set up and working properly e The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer 1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn the printer on Additional printer setup 56 Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready 3 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen 4 Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type 5 From the Wireless Configuration dialog select Guided Setup Recommended Note Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation 6 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer Note After the printer is configured the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so you can print wirelessly 7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note For more information on allowing other computers on the network to use the wireless printer see the Networking Guide Additional printer setup 57 Installing the printer on a wireless network Macintosh Make sure to disconnect the Et
22. Lightens or darkens the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 206 A Menu item Description Orientation Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Original Size Specifies the paper size of the document being scanned Letter Legal Notes e A4 is the international factory default setting Executive Tabloid e Letter is the US factory default setting Folio Statement Universal 4x 6 in 3x 5in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A3 A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Sides Duplex Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Off Long edge Notes Short edge e Off is the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape JPEG Quality Sets the quality of aJPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image Best for content 5 90 Notes e Best for content is the factory default setting e 5 reduces the file size and quality of the image e 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large e This menu applies to all scan functions Text Default Sets the quality of a text image in relati
23. Ordering Darto and SUDPINES aega a O a EA OE 247 Order ne TONS CAlITIG GOS nenna a a a AE 247 Ordering a PHotoconductor UNI bisesti E EA A 248 rderme a Waste CONE DOLLS nseni E A a 248 Ordering staple Carl lO CS a A E AN 248 Orderme a mamntenaNt E Kitea a E a E E 249 Replacine Dal bs AG SUD PING Siders sae iia a T 249 Replacing a MAINTENANCE Kitosi ana T A N O ny eniae aa abs aes dees eevee toaeens 249 Replacing a DHOLOCONGUELOR UNIT tiiereesindvswicsiaiclabecailianenesactr at maeaanee E aa eR ae 249 REPIACING a TOMEI Cal tll Ge een e a a shes sh atone daweaweyiocuus opt sawiund a vise Sa bbadar dousa A TENIAN 255 Replacing the waste toner Dotte onenian Pac aseava aes saseaseeenterieeans eval Nee aa aa aes ees 257 REDIAGCING a Staple Calli SO cirata suis seiin coun epriwnecuncit ac sonaon wanitcd essa nan tinantun ered danse taunts 262 Movine the DNN E esiin inan a iano E EE E bs weal E E EE TTE 270 Berore MOVING ANE PUNTET eaan an A A E pehadeaemaa naa ananaanen 270 Moving the printer tO another lOCATION srren na A A EEO a A E ATATEN 270 SMP DINE the Drinte arona E A T A 270 Administrative SUPpOfrt seesessoessessoessesoessosssessessosssessessessoessessesssessesssees2 L Finding advanced networking and administrator infOrmation cccccccsseccecceccescessecenecesnceeeeeeeceenees 271 CHEEKING THE Stalls OF LNG DHIDTE Peasia E TO a a a 271 CHECKING the virtualas pla Verana E a 271 Sette UPE mal CIOL ES iarna aon E A a 271 VIC
24. Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides Scanning 139 3 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt FTP gt gt enter the name of recipient gt Browse shortcuts gt name of recipient gt Search Understanding FTP options FTP This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination Note Addresses should be in dot notation form for example yyy yyy yyy yyy File Name This option lets you enter the file name of the scanned document Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents for FTP sending Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The FTP screen appears with the new setting displayed e When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes e When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image e PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com e Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access e TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu o
25. Trademarks Lexmark Lexmark with diamond design and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc registered in the United States and or other countries ScanBack is a trademark of Lexmark International Inc Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company PCL is Hewlett Packard Company s designation of a set of printer commands language and functions included in its printer products This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc is a product of Agfa Corporation Chicago Apple Computer Inc Clarendon Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Eurostile Nebiolo Geneva Apple Computer Inc GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc Helvetica Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc Marigold Arthur Baker Monaco Apple Computer Inc New York Apple Computer
26. and then click the IP tab 3 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field and then click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities 2 Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center Additional printer setup 59 3 From the Printer List choose Add and then click IP Printer 4 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field and then click Add b For AppleTalk printing Note Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer In Mac OS X version 10 5 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax 2 Click and then navigate to AppleTalk gt select the printer from the list gt Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click Default Browser tab gt More Printers From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk Zone Select the printer from the list and then click Add N OU BW N Installing the printer on a wired network These instructions apply to Ethernet and fiber optic network connections Note Make sure you have completed the initial setup of the printer For Windows users 1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD If the installation screen does not appear after a minute then launch the CD manually a C
27. and then touch Continue 5 Select your time zone and then touch Continue 6 Touch Fax and E mail to clear the icons and then touch Continue Note You can use these same steps to disable fax and e mail Caller ID is not shown Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns you may have to change the default setting There are two settings available FSK pattern 1 and DTMF pattern 2 The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns Contact your telecommunications company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use Cannot send or receive a fax These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure if applicable e Telephone e Handset e Answering machine CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK 1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack 2 Listen for a dial tone 3 If you do not hear a dial tone then plug a different telephone into the wall jack 4 lf you still do not hear a dial tone then plug a telephone into a different wall jack 5 If you hear a dia
28. are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks Avis r serv aux utilisateurs du r seau t l phonique du Canada Ce produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industrie Canada Le num ro REN ringer equivalence number num ro d quivalence de sonnerie fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant tre connect s a l interface t l phonique En bout de ligne le nombre d appareils qui peuvent tre connect s n est pas directement limit mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas d passer cing Le num ro REN du modem est indiqu sur l tiquette produit situ e a l arri re de l quipement Les compagnies de t l phone constatent que les surtensions lectriques en particulier celles dues la foudre entra nent d importants d g ts sur les terminaux priv s connect s des sou
29. e Finishing options are not supported in this bin Bin 1 e The paper capacity is 3 000 sheets when the standard finisher is installed e The paper capacity is 1 500 sheets when the booklet finisher is installed Bin 1 finishing features Offset Single Double staple Double dual staple For the Universal paper size the finishing edge must be at least 9 in 229 mm for a 3 hole punch and 10 in 254 mm for a 4 hole punch Punch Select from two three or four hole punch Single staple Use only one staple Double staple Use two staples Double dual staple Use two sets of two staples This setting is supported only for widths between 8 in 203 mm and 12 in 297 mm with lengths between 7 in 182 mm and 17 in 432 mm Paper and specialty media guidelines 93 Sie Sie Punch Punch Offset Single Double staple DoT E NEIRE E eeo yoo Envelopes Envelopes any size size For the Universal paper size the ee edge must be at least 9 in 229 mm for a 3 hole punch and 10 in 254 mm for a 4 hole punch Punch Select from two three or four hole punch Single staple Use only one staple Double staple Use two staples Double dual staple Use two sets of two staples This setting is supported only for widths between 8 in 203 mm and 12 in 297 mm with lengths between 7 in 182 mm and 17 in 432 mm Bin 2 booklet maker Bin 2 is available only when the booklet finisher is installed The
30. for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Types gt select the custom name you want to configure gt select a paper or specialty media type gt Submit Loading paper and specialty media 83 Paper and specialty media guidelines Paper guidelines Paper characteristics The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock Weight The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 220 g m 16 to 58 Ib bond grain long Paper lighter than 60 g m 16 Ib might not be stiff enough to feed properly causing jams For best performance use 75 g m 20 Ib bond grain long paper For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm 7 2 x 10 1 in we recommend 90 g m 24 Ib or heavier paper Note Duplex is supported only for 63 g m 170 g m 17 Ib 45 Ib bond paper Curl Curlis the tendency for paper to curl at its edges Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer where it is
31. from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 82 xx Waste toner bottle missing Reinsert the waste toner bottle into the printer Troubleshooting 310 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full Order a replacement waste toner bottle immediately 1 Replace the waste toner bottle For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 84 unsupported color photoconductor Remove the specified photoconductor and then install a supported one 84 xx color photoconductor missing Install the specified color photoconductor following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 84 xx color photoconductor nearly low 1 Order a replacement photoconductor 2 When print quality is reduced install the new photoconductor following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 84 xx color photoconductor low 1 Order a replacement photoconductor immediately 2 When print quality is reduced install the new photoconductor following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 83 xx Transfer module missing Insert the transfer module into the printer 84 xx Replace color photoco
32. menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Job Buffering Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes Off is the factory default setting The printer does not buffer print jobs on the printer hard disk On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Protocol Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port DTR DTR DSR XON XOFF DTR is the factory default setting Notes XON XOFF DTR DTR DSR is a hardware handshaking setting XONXOFF DTRDSR XON XOFF is a software handshaking setting XON XOFF DTR and XON XOFF DTR DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings Robust XON Determines whether the printer communicates availability to the computer Notes On e Off isthe factory default setting e This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to XON XOFF Understanding printer menus 173 Menu item Description Baud Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port 9600 Notes 19200 38400 e 9600 is the factory default setting 57600 e 138200 172800 230400 and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the 115200 Standard Serial men
33. scan sizes and options The custom scan size name replaces Custom Scan Size x inthe printer menus Notes e 11 69 inches is the US factory default setting for Width 297 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Width e 17 inches is the US factory default setting for Height 432 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Height e Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation e Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side Description Identifies the unit of measure Note Inches is the US factory default setting Millimeters is the international factory default setting Sets the portrait width Notes e 11 69 inches is the US factory default setting Inches can be increased in 0 01 inch increments e 296 9 mm is the international factory default setting Millimeters can be increased in 1 mm increments e Ifthe width exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum width allowed Sets the portrait height Notes e 48 inches is the US factory default setting Inches can be increased in 0 01 inch increments e 1219 mm is the international factory default setting Millimeters can be increased in 1 mm increments e If the height exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum height allowed Understanding printer menus 159 Menu item Description Feed Direction Specifies the feed direction Short Edge Notes Long Edge e Short Edge is th
34. then refresh the Web browser and then click Apply Setting up and using the home screen applications 33 Additional printer setup Turning on the printer 1 Open the front door A 2 Press the printer power switch 3 Close the front door A Y AUUT Additional printer setup 34 Installing internal options A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Available internal options e Memory cards Printer memory Flash memory Fonts e Firmware cards Bar Code PrintCryption e Printer hard disk e Lexmark Internal Solutions Ports ISP RS 232 C Serial ISP Parallel 1284 B ISP MarkNet N8250 802 11 b g n Wireless ISP MarkNet N8130 10 100 Fiber ISP MarkNet N8120 10 100 1000 Ethernet ISP Note An external kit is needed to support the ISP Additional printer setup 35 Accessing the system board AN CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing
35. 308 58 TOO MANY flashoptions SEAN OO neuss a a N 309 5S T00 Many trays atta CMEC segia i AEEA E T T EA 309 5S INE OMPALIOIS tray X sene a seu T alosaseasaatesieea ua ebioa ameter artaen 309 OIIREMOVE Ce FECEIVE CIS kanaa aa a 309 oZ DIER teria cca cheese E E areca E EN EE E E E 309 Be Unformatted dK sanninna E E T E TA vemeusemassaer 309 BO XX FUSE EWAN E ea a a a a 310 BO RE Ole TUSE asia T E E E EE E E E EA 310 80 Scanner maintenance required USE ADF Kit cccccccccessseceesseeeeeeeceeeueeecceeeeececseeeecsaaeeseseenscessaes seeeeeesees 310 g0 scheduled maintenance X seressecan a euetotasaece ction aheusn E AA 310 80 Replace paper pick rollers in paper source use parts and instructions in tray 1 compartment 310 82 XX Replace Waste toner DOLUC r sinrin a N A awed basse slanaetn 310 82000 Waste toner DOttIEmMISSINE mium ain rA A a O 310 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full ses sistsdcdonwesieatetasanannsenedeteadledvanveved stevadtwwadstanteetadeadinacieedeseeesededeacts sasietonteamivse 311 84 unsupported color DHOLOCONGUCTOF snis a A EE EEEE 311 s4 color photocond ctorMisSINe nusser a a a a a aA TA 311 84 xx color photoconductor nearly IOW ssssssnsssenssssessssersssssssssesssrerssrrersseresssessseesssrrresseereseresssessoesssessseess 311 84 xx color Pho toconductor NOW ea e E N E E N A 311 233XX Trons iter Mode MISSIN E naaa a a a n A a a A 311 84 xx Replace color PNOTOCONGUCIOR ccc suvasuesatvniadctaat
36. 4 to 4 Scan edge to edge On Sharpness 0 5 Temperature 4 to 4 Enable Color Fax Scans Off by default On by default Never use Always use Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Enables an equal balance of colors in the scanned image Specifies which color to drop and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specifies the contrast in the scanned image Note Best for content is the factory default setting Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible Note 0 is the factory default setting Specifies if the original document is scanned edge to edge prior to faxing Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the sharpness of a fax Note 3 is the factory default setting Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Enables color faxing Note Off by default is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 199 A Menu item Fax Receive Settings
37. Auto is the factory default setting The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks e On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages e Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages Print Recovery Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed Page Protect otherwise Notes On e Off is the factory default setting Off prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page e On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints Press Sleep Button Determines how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep Sleep button when the printer is idle Hibernate Notes Do Nothin 5 Sleep is the factory default setting Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration If the printer is in Sleep Mode then the touch screen appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode If the printer is in Hibernate mode then the touch screen is completely off and the Sleep button turns amber in color and is blinking Press and Hold Sleep Button Determines how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep Do Nothing button when the printer is idle Sleep Notes Hibernate 0 Do Nothing is the factory default setting Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to op
38. Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter and then connect the adapter to the active telephone wall jack Note Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown It will fit the wall jack used in your location Faxing 127 Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 In the Fax Name or Station Name field enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 4 Inthe Fax Number or Station Number field enter the printer fax number 5 Click Submit Setting the date and time You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send If there is a power failure then you may have to reset the date and time 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 C
39. Copy to gt select the size of the copy gt Note The printer will scale the size automatically 6 Touch Copy It Making copies using paper from a selected tray 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt size of the original document gt Copy to 4 Touch Manual Feeder or select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use Note If you choose Manual Feeder then you will also need to select the paper size and type 5 Touch Copy It Copying 107 Copying different paper sizes Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the Copy to and Copy from settings each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes Example 1 or scaled to fit a single paper size Example 2 Example 1 Copying on mixed paper sizes 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass
40. Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 Inthe Rings to Answer field enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers 4 Click Submit REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the toner or print cartridge Can receive but not send faxes These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE On the home screen touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY Load the original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY e Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial e As an alternative dial the telephone number manually Troubleshooting 324 Received fax has poor print quality Try one or more of the following RESEND THE DOCUMENT Ask the person who sent you the fax to Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory Resend the fax There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection e Increase the fax scan resolution if possible REPLACE THE CARTRIDGE When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when the prints appear faded replace the
41. If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 1 Turn the screws counterclockwise to loosen them 2 Pull the system board forward to remove it E r ZZ Hl 7 CSA N 3 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connectors Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors Additional printer setup 36 ISP connector Memory card connectors EJ Firmware and flash memory card connectors 4 Push the system board back into place Installing a memory card A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors An op
42. Image On Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page Notes e On is the factory default setting e This menu applies to all scan functions Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Lets you enter a base file name Note A maximum of 53 characters is allowed Lets you copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Specifies whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Enables an equal balance of colors in the scanned image Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease in the dropout Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specifies the contrast of the scanned image Note Best for content is the factory default setting Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 216 Menu item Negative Image On
43. Inc ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation Oxford Arthur Baker Notices 347 Palatino Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Stempel Garamond Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Taffy Agfa Corporation Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc Univers Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Federal Communications Commission FCC compliance information statement This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using ot
44. Mancdswtcawatangahadesbuaie bic deasncaied a a diodes 144 Understanding printer MenUS sessesessessessessesessessessesoessssessesoessssessessessee L47 Menus NG Eesm e A a A A traces ene aeabae 147 SUD DIES MENU sanaaa dy a A A 148 Contents 7 POO Pe ieee ates hts aaacoeacen ice sun A tation nae sa bee sae areuceavastagaae sammie anse 150 DETAUIE SOURCES NU ienie a a a a AA 150 Paper size Type MeN tecccceceecica slaausereniattnda cincdeesedoneumneaaaadaaiealtasetnacbcsoataseeseaictsivelatiecdeterte elauduuatetess buadetaateddadainddeatees 151 Comedie MP MENU eria A ised viv iva eae aerial cu atome te taia tenes 154 Sub HEUTE SIZ UN SLU a setae sack adc sacastants aSostca disuse S N 154 Paper Ox EU C IG serres erone inaa iii nEn aE ETA EENEN EE dss vente weaaludanuelen det uanweseade nina atidad ncuaind ENER 154 Paper LOAG INS MENU serron S iedaneseanesaan ted va undeeuaneeeuy nas raed odaand sementansaasaaneraunaeu 156 SECIS M M i seca errata cet ceases a ati pamisiamne ian atasie ecg A 158 CUSTOM Narnie STNE NO seiere ii r Eei NEEE A NNNNA ENEE REENE OONN 158 Custom ScanSizeS MENU seraisonr iiaeaae EnA TNE E E EN OERA NEA AEA 159 Universal Setup menina na alana su toestiante ou eaala dav dbomundaaausotiade austen amet sere 159 BIS CUP CII aeaa sine REL E AET EEEE I EARE E OTE EE 160 REPOS MENU o a EEE EO OE GEEET Gavan EE E ae E 161 RODOFUS MIEN Uiii rinan ia EN EET Ea E EANA EEEE EEE NEELA EN EEA AEEA E 161 Network Porte menUssninnen
45. No Security retains all the security information that the user has defined No Security is the factory default setting e No Effect means the reset has no effect on the device s security configuration e Reset factory security defaults deletes all security information that the user has defined and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Web page LDAP Certificate Verification Allows the user to request a server certificate Demand Notes Try e Demand means a server certificate is requested If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided the session is terminated immediately Demand is the factory default setting Allow Never Try means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided the session proceeds normally If a bad certificate is provided the session is terminated immediately Allow means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided the session proceeds normally If a bad certificate is provided it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally e Never means no server certificate is requested Minimum PIN Length Limits the digit length of the PIN 1 16 Note 4 is the is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 176 Confidential Print menu Menu item Description Max Invalid PIN Limits the number of tim
46. OK or Print 5 From the printer home screen release the print job e For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter PIN gt select print job gt specify number of copies gt Print e For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt your user name gt select print job gt specify number of copies gt Print Printing information pages Printing a font sample list 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Fonts 2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts Printing 103 Printing a directory list A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Directory Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen or press on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Canceling a print job from the computer For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder a Click or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run box type control printers c Press Enter or click OK 2 Double click the printer icon 3 Select the print job you want to cancel 4 From the keyboard press Delete For Macintosh users In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu choose System Preferences gt Print amp F
47. PCL Emulation Settings Orientation Portrait Landscape PCL Emulation Settings Lines per Page 1 255 PCL Emulation Settings A4 Width 198 mm 203 mm PCL Emulation Settings Auto CR after LF On PCL Emulation Settings Auto LF after CR On Tray Renumber Assign MP Feeder Off None 0 199 Assign Tray x Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Paper Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Env Off None 0 199 Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on a page Notes e Portrait is the factory default setting e Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page e Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page Specifies the number of lines that print on each page Notes e 60 is the US factory default setting 64 is the international default setting e The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page Paper Size and Orientation settings Select the desired Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page Sets the printer to print on A4 size paper Notes e 198 mm is the factory default setting e The 203 mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10 pitch characters Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return CR after a line feed LF control command Note Off is the factory default setting Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed LF after a c
48. Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Print irregularities Try one or more of the following Troubleshooting 333 LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setting e For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES IMIAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE Replace the worn or defective toner cartridge MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective transfer module For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective fuser For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part Print is too dark AN ABC DEF Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DARKNESS BRIGHTN
49. Pubs folder From the list of publications click the Networking Guide link e Installing the printer using Guided or Advanced wireless setup e Connecting the printer to an Ethernet or a wireless network e Troubleshooting printer connection problems Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help Opena printer software program or application and then click Help Click 2 to view context sensitive information Notes e The Help installs automatically with the printer software The printer software is located in the printer Program folder or on the desktop depending on your operating system Learning about the printer 17 What are you looking for Latest supplemental information updates and technical support Documentation Driver downloads Live chat support E mail support Telephone support Warranty information Find it here Lexmark Support Web site http support lexmark com Note Select your country or region and then select your product to view the appropriate support site Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the Support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer Record the following information located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer and have it ready when you contact support so they may serve you faster e Machine Type number Serial number e Date purchased e Store where purc
50. Security Settings menu Login Restrictions Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control Login failures panel before all users are locked out Failure time frame Notes Lockout time Ce Seas A e Login failures specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are e iim cout locked out Settings range from 1 10 attempts is the factory default setting Remote Login Timeout af Failure time frame specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting Lockout time specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting lindicates the printer does not impose a lockout time Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the Home screen before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 900 seconds 30 seconds is the factory default setting Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains idle before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 120 seconds 10 minutes is the factory default setting Security Reset Jumper Changes the value of the security settings Access controls No Security No Effect Reset factory security defaults Notes e Access controls
51. Server accessing 29 administrator settings 271 checking printer status 271 checking the status of parts 247 checking the status of supplies 247 creating a fax destination shortcut 129 creating an FTP shortcut 138 creating e mail shortcuts 117 initial fax setup 124 networking settings 271 problem accessing 345 setting up e mail alerts 271 Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide where to find 271 emission notices 348 351 355 356 Empty the hole punch box 299 emptying the hole punch box 245 encrypting the printer hard disk 238 enlarging a copy 109 envelopes loading in multipurpose feeder 79 tips 101 environmental settings brightness adjusting 69 conserving supplies 66 Eco Mode 67 Hibernate Mode 69 Quiet Mode 67 Sleep Mode 68 erasing hard disk memory 237 erasing non volatile memory 237 erasing volatile memory 236 Error reading USB hub Remove hub 299 Ethernet networking Macintosh 60 Windows 60 Ethernet port 52 exit bins 95 exporting a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 32 exterior of the printer cleaning 239 e mail canceling 120 e mail alerts low supply levels 271 paper jam 271 setting up 271 e mail function setting up 116 e mail screen advanced options 122 options 120 121 122 E mail Settings menu 205 e mail shortcuts creating using the Embedded Web Server 117 e mail sending using a shortcut number 118 using the address book 118 using the touch screen 118 e mailing adding message line 119
52. The print jobs are held until deleted from the Help Jobs menu Repeat Repeat prints and stores print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting Printing 102 Printing confidential and other held jobs Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you choose to delete them For Windows users 1 With a document open click File gt Print 2 Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 3 Click Print and Hold 4 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN Ul Click OK or Print 6 From the printer home screen release the print job e For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter PIN gt select print job gt specify number of copies gt Print e For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt your user name gt select print job gt specify number of copies gt Print For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing 3 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click
53. This option sets the output color for the scanned image Touch to enable or disable color Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics e Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos e Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer e Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer e Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film e Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine e Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper e Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press e Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to
54. WIE TODOS ia a E T aa a a a a a aes 272 Contents 9 Restoring TACLOry default SCRUM OS ios cczseccstniordoorameacicadiactancoaciobnanas a ra 272 Clearing TAINS oasiansaciecceesctavecsdcuuiees E a a 7S Avoiding JaN S renar eran a O A a ence h eweeeeeeeaees 273 Understanding jamm numbers and lOcation Sarracenis a a E a a a aa 273 2012027 PIP Hans R E R 275 205 Da pEr Iiei e E E A devaceneenaaeat 276 DSO paper JaN T a a a a Cabenaaees 278 ZS NWA OC T aa A EI A T E E E T te ecu ese AEE EE E A E 278 PAA E E A PET EEA E EEE E E A VAA T E A EETA A PEA S AE EEEE EET 280 230 Pa PEro r a a OA omeneeotasses 286 2S1 paper aM a a a a a a 287 AX Paper JIS eaaa T E E E A 289 459 SLADE JAM esan E a OT 294 ZOEY OC Pa CF JaN oani a a a T 296 TrOUDIESROOTIN E eisir a a 27 Understandihe Printer Messages srir wsacesecimedaeancasuddeemesastoveraeieh T T dome aeaewdecanaaeeeds 297 AGIOSTING COLON enara a A A T A I N 297 Bin 2 is unable to lower remove paper and check for an obstruction sessssssessseersserssseresssressrereerereseress 297 Change paper source to CUStOM type name sirere nner n NEN EE E AE ATE 297 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation cscccessecccseccceececeesceeeneceesececneceeeess 297 Change paper source to custom string ccccccsececceseeeccceseeceeeseceeeesecceeeececsueeessaeecessuaeeeseeaeeeseeeeesaeeeenees 297 Change paper source to custom string load orientation
55. a DSL filter The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone line that can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly e You do not need to attach the printer to a computer but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line to send and receive faxes Equipment and service options Fax connection setup Connect directly to the telephone line See Connecting to an analog telephone line on page 125 Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line DSL or ADSL service See Connecting to a DSL service on page 126 Connect to a Private Branch eXchange PBX or Integrated See Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system on page 126 Services Digital Network ISDN system Use a Distinctive Ring service See Connecting to a distinctive ring service on page 127 Connect through an adapter used in your area See Connecting to an adapter for your country or region on page 127 Connecting to an analog telephone line If your telecommunications equipment uses a US style RJ11 telephone line then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack Faxing 125 Connecting to a DSL service If you subscribe to a DSL service then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord and the
56. and Binding e Sides Duplex Use this to specify if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e mail e Orientation Use this to specify the orientation of the original document and then change Sides and Binding to match the orientation e Binding Use this to specify if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge of the page Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings e Advanced Imaging Use to change or adjust Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before scanning a document e Custom Job Use to combine multiple scan jobs into a single scan job Scanning 145 e Edge Erase Use to remove smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scanned image e Transmission Log Use to print the transmissi
57. appear ON transparencies OF PAPEL cccssseccesssecceessscecaeaeceseeseeeseeseeesuaacesseaeeeesaeeeas 338 Streaked horizontal lines appear on printsS sssseessssnsssseesserreserrsssrosssrrssserersreresserssseesssrerserrerersssereserereeeee 339 Streaked vertical lines appear on prints wisisinssccadesiadvannsecanoesceuetairdsbauesecdewradeinecianetaveied deadeeilen toveiestnbatectecanbevniss 340 Toner fog or background shading appears on the page cesccccssssscccessscccessecccceaceesseaceesauaeceesaueeeesaaeeeee sees 340 TUTE CDS O iraa a a a a a da pacts lvoe sseinaned ease 341 MOM CIs SOC Ch Sh irsi ETEEN A E EA EE E N TR 342 Transparency pint auality 1S DOO aroei aen T a T a a 342 Soline color GUAIILY Proble MS stasuis ahews oes na a T A e a RE 342 FAQ a DOUt GOlOF DEIN CINE saraan a A A A 342 Empedded Web SERVErdOeS NOtoOpeNeeaimeatass iaaa a T E ean oaetoewlas 345 CHECK ENeMeLWOFkK CONNECHON tuntien e e a a a e a a aia rlecacwen 345 Check the address entered in the Web browser ssssssussssessssssessseersrrrssssrssseesssrrresrrrossresssreesssessserereessseesse 345 Temporarily disable Web proxy servers saswwieszsunsvecadescanleesseandeastedessnadnoadsnctsenssates iadsdmedieanweanbeveliaindwenadesisntwanedes 345 CONTACTS CUStOmMmeEr SUD DOVE Toroi a r 345 NOTICES aran a a aa a AO Productiintormat iO Nosi tase dents crete reietin atanth sa 0s oaeioncd ec Riateta ane aia lau c eta kda ustetia che an neta eta 346 LOE G
58. applies a color conversion table that tries to produce output that matches SWOP color output Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting Euro CMYK applies a color conversion table that tries to produce output that matches EuroScale color output Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US CMYK color conversion table Spot Color Replacement Allows users to create and save custom spot colors with corresponding CMYK values Understanding printer menus 227 Utilities menu Menu item Description Remove Held Jobs Confidential Held Not Restored All Format Flash Yes No Delete Downloads on Disk Delete Now Do Not Delete Activate Hex Trace Coverage Estimator Off On Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk Notes e Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer Bookmarks print jobs on flash drives and other types of held jobs are not affected e Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or memory Formats the flash memory Warning Potential Damage Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is being formatted Notes Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory No cancels the format request Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option card in the printer A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating properly for
59. approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer s components The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not cut twist bind crush or place heavy objects on the power cord Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls If any of these things happen a risk of fire or electrical shock results Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it Refer service or repairs other than those described in the user documentation to a professional service person Safety information 15 A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper drawer or tray separately Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurati
60. be scanned and then sent to a color printer Creating shortcuts Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers using the Embedded Web Server or using the printer touch screen Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click Manage Shortcuts Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup Scanning 138 5 Enter the appropriate information 6 Enter a shortcut number If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 7 Click Add Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen 1 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt type the FTP address gt gt enter a name for the shortcut gt Done 2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number i
61. bin Finisher bin 1 Finisher bin 2 Note Finisher bin 2 is available only when a booklet finisher is installed Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Paper jam in door H 1 Open door H Note Door H is located between the finisher exit bins 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 289 3 Close door H 4 If necessary touch Continue from the printer control panel Paper jam in door G 1 Open door G Clearing jams 290 Vane 7 w M P 1 lt SS 4 r H 4 Pa a pa N7 Area Cover knob or handle name afwo a knob 63 a lemme Ps leer a 2 Lift cover G1 lever 3 Firmly grasp any jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure to remove all paper fragments after gently pulling out any jammed paper inside door G 4 Move cover G2 to the right and then remove any jammed paper Note If the paper is jammed in the rollers then rotate knob G3 counterclockwise 5 Move cover G4 down and then remove any jammed paper 6 Move cover G7 to the left and then remove any jammed paper Clearing jams 291 7 Pull handle G9 until the tray is completely open 8 Lift the inside cover If the paper is jammed in the rollers then rotate knob G8 count
62. browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings 3 From the Fax Forwarding menu select one of the following e Print e Print and Forward e Forward Faxing 136 4 From the Forward to menu select one of the following e Fax e E mail FTP e LDSS eSF 5 In the Forward to Shortcut field enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded Note The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the Forward to menu 6 Click Submit Faxing 137 Scanning Scanning to an FTP address Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol FTP server Only one FTP address may be sent to the server at a time Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon An FTP destination could also be another PostScript printer for example a color document can
63. cartridge MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 Inthe Max Speed box click one of the following 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 4 Click Submit Solving home screen applications problems An application error has occurred CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS 1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer then you can e View the information on the printer control panel home screen or in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings or Configuration Troubleshooting 325 3 Click Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF gt System tab gt Log 4 From the Filter menu select an application status 5 From the Application menu select an application and then click Submit MMIAKE SURE THE FILE NAME YOU WANT TO SCAN TO IS NOT ALREADY IN USE Verify that the file to which you want to scan is not open by another application or user To help prevent errors make sure eithe
64. colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 332 light indicator 23 linking trays 82 Load Manual Feeder with custom string 302 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name 302 Load Manual Feeder with paper size 302 Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper size 302 Load staples 302 loading 2000 sheet high capacity feeder 77 520 sheet tray standard or optional 72 letterhead in 2000 sheet high capacity feeder 77 multipurpose feeder 79 optional 1 150 sheet tray 75 optional 850 sheet tray 75 loading card stock in multipurpose feeder 79 loading envelopes in multipurpose feeder 79 loading letterhead paper orientation 100 loading the multipurpose feeder 79 loading the standard tray 72 loading transparencies in multipurpose feeder 79 M maintenance kit ordering 249 replacing 249 making copies using paper from selected tray 107 Manual feeder expects paper size Check paper source guides 303 max speed using 97 max yield using 97 memory types installed on printer 236 memory card installing 37 troubleshooting 327 Memory full cannot print faxes 303 menu settings page printing 53 menus Standard Network 162 Standard USB 168 Substitute Size 154 Supplies 148 TCP IP 165 Universal Setup 159 Utilities 228 Wireless 167 Active NIC 162 AppleTalk 167 Bin Setup 160 Booklet Adjustments 234 Confidential Print 177 Configure MP 154 Copy Settings 190 Custom Names 158 Custom S
65. computer to view the file The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified Scanning to a flash drive 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer The USB Drive home screen appears 4 Select the destination folder and then touch Scan to USB drive 5 Adjust the scan settings 6 Touch Scan It Understanding the Scan Center features The Scan Center software lets you modify scan settings and select where to send the scanned output Scan settings modified with the Scan Center software can be saved and used for other scan jobs The following features are available e Scan and send images to your computer e Convert scanned images to text e Preview the scanned image and adjust the brightness and contrast e Make larger scans without losing detail e Scan two sided documents Scanning 143 Using the ScanBack Utility You can use the Lexmark ScanBack Utility to create scan to PC profiles The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from the Lexmark Web site on http support lexmark com 1 Set up ascan to PC profile a Launch the
66. do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Device Status The device status shows the following e Paper tray settings e Level of toner in the print cartridge e Percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit e Capacity measurements of certain printer parts Checking the virtual display 1 Open an Embedded Web Server associated with your printer Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel showing printer messages Setting up e mail alerts Configure the printer to send you e mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed or added or when there is a paper jam 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on t
67. flash drive 314 held jobs do not print 315 incorrect characters print 316 incorrect margins 332 jammed pages are not reprinted 329 job prints from wrong tray 316 job prints on wrong paper 316 jobs do not print 314 Large jobs do not collate 316 multiple language PDF files do not print 313 paper curl 333 paper frequently jams 329 print job takes longer than expected 315 tray linking does not work 316 unexpected page breaks occur 317 troubleshooting print quality black streaks on a page 338 blank pages 336 characters have jagged edges 330 clipped images 330 fine horizontal lines 330 gray background 331 light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 332 poor transparency quality 342 print irregularities 333 print is too dark 334 print is too light 335 repeating defects appear ona page 336 shadow images appear on prints 331 skewed print 337 solid color pages 338 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 339 streaked vertical lines on prints 340 toner fog or background shading on the page 340 toner rubs off 341 Index 370 toner specks 342 white streaks on a page 338 troubleshooting printer options 2 000 sheet drawer problems 327 cannot detect flash memory card 328 cannot detect printer hard disk 328 internal print server 328 Internal Solutions Port 328 memory card 327 option does not work 326 paper tray problems 327 USB parallel interface card 328 troubleshooting scan cannot scan
68. from a computer 321 partial document or photo scans 321 scan was not successful 320 scanner unit does not close 317 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 320 turning on the printer 34 U understanding the home screen buttons and icons 24 Universal Paper Size setting 71 Universal Setup menu 159 unlinking trays 82 Unsupported disk 304 Unsupported USB device please remove 299 Unsupported USB hub please remove 299 updating options in printer driver 54 USB port 52 USB parallel interface card troubleshooting 328 using Eco Mode 67 using Hibernate Mode 69 using max speed and max yield 97 using Quiet Mode 67 using recycled paper 66 using shortcuts sending fax 131 using the address book 118 sending fax 131 using the ScanBack Utility 144 using the touch screen buttons 26 Utilities menu 228 V verify print jobs 102 printing from a Macintosh computer 103 printing from Windows 103 viewing reports 272 viewing a fax log 133 virtual display checking using Embedded Web Server 271 volatile memory 236 erasing 236 volatility statement of 236 W waste toner bottle ordering 248 replacing 257 wiping the printer hard disk 237 wired network setup using Macintosh 60 using Windows 60 Wireless menu 167 wireless network configuration information 55 installation using Macintosh 58 installation using Windows 56 wireless network setup in Windows 56 wireless printer setup in Macintosh 58 WS Scan about 31 X XPS
69. gently until it stops 4 If necessary touch Continue jam cleared from the printer control panel Clearing jams 283 Paper jam in the tray exit 1 Gently move the tray to the left until it stops Arg Wks 3 Gently put the tray back into position 4 If necessary touch Continue jam cleared from the printer control panel Paper jam in the top cover 1 Gently move the tray to the left until it stops Clearing jams 284 2 Open the top cover a gt N he fj J XW N 3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out T IW r Clearing jams 285 Close the top cover ALAL WY 5 Gently put the tray back into position 6 If necessary touch Continue jam cleared from the printer control panel 250 paper jam 1 Remove any jammed pages from the multipurpose feeder 2 Load paper into the multipurpose feeder 3 If necessary touch Continue jam cleared from the printer control panel Clearing jams 286 281 paper jam Paper jam in door A 1 Open door A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Determine where the jam is located and then remove it a Ifthe paper is visible under the fuser then firmly grasp it on each side and pull it out Note Make
70. gt reduce the current setting e From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Background removal gt reduce the current setting Partial document or photo copies These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting e For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Solving scanner problems Checking an unresponsive scanner If your scanner is not responding then make sure e The printer is turned on The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer print server option or other network device e The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker Troubleshooting 319 e The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working Once you have checked each of these possibilities tur
71. images appear on prints 331 shipping the printer 270 shortcuts creating e mail 117 fax destination 129 FTP address 139 FTP destination 138 showing icons on the home screen 29 Sleep Mode adjusting 68 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator 304 SMTP Setup menu 174 Some held jobs were not restored 304 Standard Network menu 162 standard tray loading 72 Standard USB menu 168 staple cartridge replacing 262 staple cartridges ordering 248 staple jam clearing 455 staple jam 294 statement of volatility 236 status of parts checking 247 status of supplies checking 247 storing paper 87 supplies 246 storing print jobs 102 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 339 streaks appear on a page 338 Index 369 subject and message information adding to e mail 119 Substitute Size menu 154 supplies checking status 247 checking from printer control panel 247 checking using the Embedded Web Server 247 conserving 66 storing 246 using recycled paper 66 Supplies menu 148 supplies ordering maintenance kit 249 photoconductor units 248 staple cartridges 248 toner cartridges 247 waste toner bottle 248 supported flash drives 99 supported paper sizes 88 supported paper types and weights 90 system board accessing 36 system board cover reattaching 36 T tandem tray module installing 50 TCP IP menu 165 telecommunication notices 351 353 354 Telephone port 52 tips card stock 102 envelopes 101
72. is the factory default setting Specifies whether prints are stapled Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a stapler is installed Understanding printer menus 217 Hole Punch On Hole Punch Mode 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes Duplex Binding Long Edge Short Edge Paper Saver Orientation Auto Landscape Portrait Paper Saver Off 2 Up 3 Up 4 Up 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Paper Saver Border None Solid Paper Saver Ordering Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical Specifies whether prints have punched holes Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a puncher is installed Determines the type of punch finishing performed on prints Notes e 3 holes is the factory default setting if 3 hole puncher is installed e 4 holes is the factory default setting if 2 hole and 4 hole puncher is installed e This menu appears only when a puncher is installed Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page Notes e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Specifies the orientation of a multiple page document Note Auto is the factory
73. labels paper 101 on using letterhead 100 on using transparencies 100 tips on using letterhead 100 toner cartridge replacing 255 toner cartridges ordering 247 recycling 70 toner darkness adjusting 96 toner fog or background shading appears on the page 340 toner rubs off 341 toner specks 342 touch screen buttons 26 transparencies copying on 106 loading 100 loading in multipurpose feeder 79 tips on using 100 using 100 tray linking assigning a custom paper type name 83 tray unlinking assigning a custom paper type name 83 trays linking 82 unlinking 82 troubleshooting an application error has occurred 325 cannot open Embedded Web Server 345 checking an unresponsive printer 313 checking an unresponsive scanner 319 contacting customer support 345 FAQ about color printing 342 fax and e mail functions are not set up 321 Scan to Network 325 solving basic printer problems 313 troubleshooting copy copier does not respond 317 partial document or photo copies 319 poor copy quality 317 poor scanned image quality 320 scanner unit does not close 317 troubleshooting display display is blank 313 display shows only diamonds 313 troubleshooting fax caller ID is not shown 322 can receive but not send faxes 324 can send but not receive faxes 324 cannot send or receive a fax 322 received fax has poor print quality 325 troubleshooting paper feed message remains after jam is cleared 329 troubleshooting print error reading
74. megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b eldirasainak slenska H r me l sir Lexmark International Inc yfir v a essi vara er samr mi vi grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International Inc dichiara che questo questo prodotto conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar o Lexmark International Inc deklar ka is izstr d jums atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem Lietuvi iuo Lexmark International Inc deklaruoja kad is produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB direktyvos nuostatas Malti Bil pre enti Lexmark International Inc jiddikjara li dan il prodott huwa konformi mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma dispo izzjonijiet o rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid Direttiva 1999 5 KE Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International Inc dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Norsk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Notices 357 Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International Inc o wiadcza e niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasa
75. menu 229 Index 371
76. of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors there are many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions For recommendations on how the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color matching problems see the question How can match a particular color such as a corporate logo The printed page appears tinted Can adjust the color Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted for example everything printed seems to be too red This can be caused by environmental conditions paper type lighting conditions or user preference In these instances adjust the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color Color Balance provides the user with the ability to make subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane Selecting positive or negative values for cyan magenta yellow and black from the Color Balance menu will slightly increase or decrease the amount of toner used for the chosen color For example if a printed page has a red tint then decreasing both magenta and yellow could potentially improve the color balance My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected Is there anything can do to improve the color This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors To obtain the highest projected color quality transmissive overhead projectors are recommended If a refle
77. on the printer control panel home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Home screen customization A list of basic printer functions appears 3 Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen Note Cleared check box items are hidden 4 Click Submit Setting up and using the home screen applications 29 Activating the home screen applications Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications Before you can use these applications first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server For more information about accessing the Embedded Web Server see Accessing the Embedded Web Server on page 29 For detailed information about configuring and using the home screen applications visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Setting up Forms and Favorites Icon Description The application helps you simplify and streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the home screen Note The printer must have permission to access the network folder FTP site or Web site where the bookmark is stored From the computer where the bookmark is stored use sharing security and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access For help see the documentation that came with your operatin
78. one sheet 111 on both sides of the paper duplexing 108 on letterhead 106 on transparencies 106 photos 106 placing separator sheets between copies 110 quick copy 105 reducing 109 selecting a tray 107 to a different size 107 using the ADF 105 using the scanner glass flatbed 106 copying different paper sizes 108 copying multiple pages on one sheet 111 copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 108 copying on letterhead 106 copying on transparencies 106 copying photos 106 corrupted printer hard disk 299 creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 129 creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 138 creating profiles using the ScanBack Utility 144 custom name configuring 83 Custom Names menu 158 custom paper type name creating 83 Custom Scan Sizes menu 159 Custom Type x changing name 83 changing paper type 83 Custom Types menu 158 D date and time fax setting 128 daylight savings time faxing 129 Default Source menu 150 different paper sizes copying 108 directory list printing 104 disk wiping 237 Disk Wiping menu 177 display troubleshooting display is blank 313 display shows only diamonds 313 display printer control panel 23 adjusting brightness 69 disposing of printer hard disk 236 distinctive ring service fax connecting to 127 documents printing from Macintosh 96 from Windows 96 duplexing 108 E Eco Mode setting 67 Edit Security Setups menu 175 Embedded Web
79. pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Quiet Mode gt select a setting gt Submit Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 67 Off Use factory default settings This setting supports the Note Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet performance specifications of your printer Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing Reduce printer noise e Print jobs will process at a reduced speed e Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print There will be a short delay before the first page is printed If your printer has faxing capability fax sounds are reduced or disabled including those made by the fax speaker and ringer The fax is placed in standby mode The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off The printer will ignore the Advance Start command Adjusting Sleep Mode To save energy you can decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep Mode Available settings range from 1 240 minutes The factory default setting is 30 minutes Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate t
80. paper capacity of Bin 2 booklet maker is 300 sheets or 20 sets of 15 sheet booklets Bin 2 finishing features Bi fold Booklet fold Saddle staple SEF The paper is loaded in the short edge orientation The short edge of the paper enters the printer first Bi fold Each page is individually folded and stacked separately Booklet fold A multiple page job is folded along the center into a single booklet Saddle staple A booklet fold print job is stapled along the center fold Paper and specialty media guidelines 94 Setting the finisher exit bin 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Bin setup gt Output bin 2 Select a bin and then touch Submit Notes e This feature is available only when a finisher is installed e The standard finisher bin is the factory default setting Paper and specialty media guidelines 95 Printing The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 273 and Storing paper on page 87 Printing a document Printing a document 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper 2 Send the print job For Windows users a With a document open click File gt Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup c Adjust settings as necessary d Click OK gt Print For Macintosh u
81. quality e Always use new undamaged paper e Before loading paper know the recommended print side of the paper This information is usually indicated on the paper package Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes types or weights in the same source mixing results in jams Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead e Use grain long for 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib weight paper e Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process e Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces Use papers printed with heat resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner Inks that are oxidation set or oil based generally meet these requirements latex inks might not When in doubt contact the paper supplier Paper and specialty media guidelines 85 Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Using recycled paper and other office papers As an environmentally conscientious company Lexmark supports the use o
82. quality of the wireless connection Lets you view the encryption method that a wireless network uses Note Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS is a simple and secure configuration that lets you establish a wireless network and enable network security without requiring prior knowledge of Wi Fi technology It is no longer necessary to configure the network name SSID and WEP key or WPA passphrase for network devices AppleTalk menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Understanding printer menus 167 Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt AppleTalk Activate Yes No View Name Shows the assigned AppleTalk name Note The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Description Activates AppleTalk support Note Yes is the factory default setting View Address Shows the assigned AppleTalk address Note The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Set Zone default Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network Note When default is selected the printer uses the AppleTalk zone that the list of zones available on the network router identifies as the default zone for the network If no default zone exists Standard USB menu PS SmartSwitch then the zone marked with an is the default setting Description Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
83. seconds and then turn the printer on Troubleshooting 313 If Ready does not appear then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support Error message about reading USB drive appears Make sure the flash drive is supported Print jobs do not print Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PROBLEM WITH YOUR PRINTER From the printer control panel check the status If necessary follow the recovery instructions MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT Make sure Ready appears on the display before sending a print job CHECK IF A SUPPLY IS MISSING OR NEEDS REPLACEMENT Remove and then reinstall or replace the supply CHECK IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL Remove the paper stack from the standard exit bin CHECK IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY Load paper in the tray MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED e Verify that you are using the correct printer software e If the printer is connected to your computer through a USB port then make sure you are running a supported operating system and using a compatible printer software MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS WORKING PROPERLY e Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network e Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected If the status is Not Connected then check the network cables and then try printing the network setup page again Contact you
84. section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Note You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer 2 Add the printer e For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later a From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax b Click and then click the IP tab c Type the IP address of your printer in the Address field and then click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier a From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities b Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center c From the Printer List click Add and then click IP Printer d Type the IP address of your printer in the Address field and then click Add e For AppleTalk printing Note Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer In Mac OS X version 10 5 a From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax b Click and then navigate to AppleTalk gt select the printer from the list gt Add Additional printer setup 63 In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier a From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click the Default Browser tab gt More Printers From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk From the second pop up menu select Local
85. size without size sensing 3 Paper size is supported if set to metric 4 Paper size is supported if set to US 6 Paper size is supported if loaded in long edge orientation 7 Custom size envelope printing is not supported Paper and specialty media guidelines 89 2 000 Paper size and Manual Scanner sheet Duplex ADF dimension envelope glass drawer C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm 6 38 x 9 01 in B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 in Other Envelope 76 22 x 76 22 mm 3 x 3 in up to 296 93 x 427 48 mm 11 69 x 16 83 in 1 Source supports size with size sensing Source supports size without size sensing 3 Paper size is supported if set to metric 4 Paper size is supported if set to US gt Paper size is supported if loaded in short edge orientation 6 Paper size is supported if loaded in long edge orientation 7 Custom size envelope printing is not supported Supported paper types and weights Printer The printer supports 60 120 g m 2 16 74 lb paper weights The duplex unit supports 64 128 g m 2 17 34 Ib paper weights Note Labels transparencies envelopes and card stock always print at reduced speed Paper and specialty media guidelines 90 Paper type 2 000 MP feeder Manual Manual Duplex ADF Scanner sheet paper envelope glass drawer Paper Zvw M a Vo W Plain Bond Glossy Heavy Glossy Colored Custom Type x Letterhead Light Heavy Preprinted Rou
86. status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel From the home screen touch Status Supplies gt View Supplies Checking the status of parts and supplies from a network computer Note The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Device Status Ordering parts and supplies To order parts and supplies in the U S contact Lexmark at 1 800 539 6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area In other countries or regions visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Notes e The gauges displayed are an estimate of the life left for the supply or part indicated next to each gauge e All page life estimates for supplies assume printing on a single side of letter or A4 size plain paper Ordering toner cartridges When 88 xx color cartridge lowor 88 xx color cartridge nearly lowappears ordera new cartridge When 88 Replace color cartridge appears replace the specified cartridge Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO IEC 19798 standard with about 5 coverage per color Extremely low print coverage less than 1 25 for a color for extended periods of ti
87. sure all paper fragments are removed b Ifthe paper is not visible then you will need to remove the fuser unit Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the center of the fuser unit Doing so will damage the fuser 1 Remove the thumbscrew from each side of the fuser unit by rotating them counterclockwise 2 Lift the handles on each side of the fuser and then pull to remove the fuser unit Notes e Make sure all paper fragments are removed e ifthe paper is in the fuser then lower the fuser nip release lever and switch it to envelope mode e After removing the jammed paper return the lever to the proper position Clearing jams 287 4 Align the fuser unit using the handles on each side and then place it back into the printer 3 Close door A 4 If necessary touch Continue from the printer control panel Paper jam in cover F paper transport 1 Open cover F 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Note If the paper jam on the right is difficult to remove then rotate the knob counterclockwise 3 Close cover F 4 If necessary touch Continue from the printer control panel Clearing jams 288 4yy xx paper jams If the jammed paper is visible in any of the finisher exit bins then firmly grasp the paper on each side and then gently pull it out Standard finisher
88. the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Radio interference notice Warning This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements of EN55024 This product is not intended to be used in residential domestic environments This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Notice to users of the US telephone network FCC requirements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the back of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ H HTXXXX If requested this number must be provided to your telephone company Notices 351 This equipment uses the RJ 11C Universal Service Order Code USOC jack A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See your setup documentation for more informati
89. the RGB or CMYK combination that creates the color observed These pages can be used to help decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed output e From a browser window type the IP address of the printer to access a complete list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server Understanding printer menus 226 Menu item Manual Color RGB Image Vivid SRGB Display Display True Black sRGB Vivid Off RGB Text Vivid sRGB Display Display True Black SRGB Vivid Off RGB Graphics Vivid SRGB Display Display True Black sRGB Vivid Off Manual Color CMYK Image US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off CMYK Text US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off CMYK Graphics US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off Description Customizes the RGB color conversions Notes e sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image This applies a color conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer monitor sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics sRGB Vivid applies a color table that increases saturation This is preferred for business graphics and text e Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter more saturated colors Display True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner for neutral gray colors Customizes the CMYK color conversions Notes US CMYK is the US factory default setting US CMYK
90. the tray Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper size Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the manual feeder Touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray e Cancel the print job Load staples Try one or more of the following e Replace the specified staple cartridge in the finisher e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Note The print job will be stapled if the staple cartridge is replaced or inserted Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Troubleshooting 302 Manual feeder expects paper size Check paper source guides Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper size in the manual feeder e Physically adjust paper source guides to a recognized paper size e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size then it prints from the default source Memory full cannot print faxes There is not enough memory to print the fax job Touch Continue to clear the message without printing Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been restarted Power off wait 2 seconds power on
91. the upper left corner MAKE SURE TO USE THE APPROPRIATE Copy SETTINGS When patterns moir appear in the output e On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being scanned e From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Sharpness gt lower the Sharpness setting e On the Copy screen make sure no scaling is being selected When the text is light or disappearing e From the Copy screen navigate to Content gt Text gt 4 gt select the appropriate source for the original document being copied gt 7 e From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Sharpness gt increase the current setting Troubleshooting 318 e From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Background removal and then reduce the current setting e From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Contrast gt increase the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Shadow detail gt reduce the current setting When the output appears washed out or overexposed e On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being scanned e From the Copy screen adjust the Darkness setting e From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Shadow detail
92. this menu item to be available e The flash memory option card must not be read write or write protected Removes downloads from the printer hard disk including all held jobs buffered jobs and parked jobs Notes Delete Now configures the printer control panel to return to the originating screen after the deletion process is completed e Do Not Delete sets the printer control panel to return to the main Utilities menu Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem Notes e When activated all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not executed e To exit or deactivate Hex Trace turn the printer off or reset the printer Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 228 XPS menu Menu item Description Print Error Pages Prints a page containing information on errors including XML markup errors Note Off is the factory default setting On PDF menu Menu item Description Scale to Fit Scales page content to fit the selected paper size No Note No is the factory default setting Yes Annotations Prints annotations in a PDF Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print PostScript menu Menu item Description Print PS Error Prints a p
93. turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding 2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin 3 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water Warning Potential Damage Do not use household cleaners or detergents as they may damage the finish of the printer 4 Wipe only the outside of the printer making sure to include the standard exit bin Warning Potential Damage Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer 5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job Maintaining the printer 239 Cleaning the scanner glass Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems such as streaks on copied or scanned images 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner cover Ta wie underside ofthe scammer cover ee o va pores 3 Wipe the areas shown and let them dry 4 Close the scanner cover Maintaining the printer 240 Cleaning the printhead lenses Clean the printhead lenses when you encounter print quality problems 1 Open the front door 2 Slide the release lever to the left to unlock the cover 3 Open the cover Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoc
94. using a USB cable or Ethernet cable Be sure to match the following e The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer e The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port Additional printer setup 52 E a e Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any network adapter or the printer in the area shown while actively printing A loss of data or a malfunction can occur Verifying printer setup Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following e Menu settings page Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page If an option you installed is not listed then it is not installed correctly Remove the option and install it again e Network setup page If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration Printing a menu settings page From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Menu Settings Page Additional printer setup 53 Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page
95. where you can change the following settings e Advanced Imaging Use to adjust the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Negative Image Mirror Image Scan edge to edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature image output settings before sending the image e Edge Erase Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Transmission Log Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log e Custom Job Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job Scanning to a computer or flash drive Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer Scanning to a computer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not
96. wireless ISP e Only one network connection at a time is active If you want to switch the connection type between wired and wireless you must first turn the printer off connect the cable to switch to a wired connection or disconnect the cable to switch to a wireless connection and then turn the printer on For Windows users 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click or click Start and then click Run 3 In the Start Search or Run box type control printers 4 Press Enter or click OK The printer folder opens Additional printer setup 62 5 Locate the printer that has changed Note If there is more than one copy of the printer then update all of them with the new IP address 6 Right click the printer 7 Click Properties gt Ports tab 8 Select the port from the list and then click Configure Port 9 Type the new IP address in the Printer Name or IP Address field 10 Click OK gt Close For Macintosh users 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP
97. 2 icons on the home screen hiding 29 showing 29 Image menu 233 importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 32 initial fax setup 124 using the Embedded Web Server 124 Insert hole punch box 300 Install Tray x 300 installing a memory card 37 installing an Internal Solutions Port 41 installing on a wireless network using Windows 56 installing options order of installation 49 Index 364 installing printer on wireless network 56 installing printer hard disk 44 installing printer on a network wired networking 60 installing printer on a wireless network using Macintosh 58 installing printer software adding options 54 installing the 1 tray module 50 installing the 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder 50 installing the 3 tray module 50 installing the printer software 54 installing the tandem tray module 50 internal print server troubleshooting 328 Internal Solutions Port changing port settings 62 installing 41 troubleshooting 328 IPv6 menu 166 J jams avoiding 273 locating jam areas 273 locations 273 numbers 273 jams clearing 201 202 paper jams 275 203 paper jam 276 230 paper jam 278 231 paper jam 278 24x paper jam 280 250 paper jam 286 281 paper jam 287 28y xx paper jams 296 455 staple jam 294 4yy xx paper jams 289 Job Accounting menu 221 L labels paper tips 101 letterhead copying on 106 loading 2000 sheet high capacity feeder 77 loading multipurpose feeder 100 loading trays 100 light
98. 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Mixed Sizes gt 4 gt Copy to gt Auto Size Match gt 7 gt Copy It The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document Example 2 Copying on a single paper size 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Mixed Sizes gt gt Copy to gt Letter gt 4 gt Copy It The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on the paper size selected Copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen
99. 257 x 364 mm 10 12 x 14 33 in 1 Source supports size with size sensing Source supports size without size sensing 3 Paper size is supported if set to metric 4 Paper size is supported if set to US gt Paper size is supported if loaded in short edge orientation 6 Paper size is supported if loaded in long edge orientation 7 Custom size envelope printing is not supported Scanner glass Jt 4 6 amp 2 4 5 J 2 4 6 amp 1 3 5 6 J 2 4 6 amp 1 3 5 6 Jt 4 6 amp 2 3 5 Jt 4 6 amp 2 3 5 J 2 4 amp 1 3 Paper and specialty media guidelines 88 Paper size and dimension een van Mem MET drawer paper envelope Poy ff Scanner glass v v v A3 297 x 420 mm 11 69 x 16 54 in 11x17 279 x 432 mm 11 x 17 in lt lt E E 3 J 2 4 amp 1 3 Oficio M xico 216 x 340 mm 8 5 x 13 4 in lt lt Folio 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 in lt lt Statement 140 x216 mm 5 5 x 8 5 in Universal 64 297 mm x 148 432 mm 2 52 11 69 x 5 83 17 01 in 7 3 4 Envelope Monarch 98 x191 mm 3 875 x 7 5 in 9 Envelope 98 x226 mm 3 875 x 8 9 in Com 10 Envelope 105 x 241 mm 4 12 x 9 5 in gt Paper size is supported if loaded in short edge orientation DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 in 1 Source supports size with size sensing Source supports
100. ANNING cccccsseecccsseececeseeeceeseeseeesseceseeeseeseesseees 133 Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to Memory essssesssessrerseresssessrrresresrresee 134 Understanding Tax ODCIONS redrei n O A O 134 CONTONE orrai E EE E EA E A A E T E e 134 RESOUN sneen a a a a a a a a aa a dabatbonwae nant 134 DAV IKINGS Sera a aE E E E E 135 COLON usaia e a a A E a E E aucun tueetd Sadeyanteetn 135 AEAEE AE o E EE E E O A A Cha sewn E E E E T T E E E E E E E E 135 SC ANP OV IC W oen AE N EE NA N EOE 135 Delayed Send oramne en EA A a a a 135 POAVAN CCA ODEON S mior a e E a A a e a unioedseineuies 135 FIOIGING and forwarding TaAKeS esti teencdctuldcetescted bas T EEEE EE A A 136 ROLINE Mie aane E A EA N E N 136 Forwarding d Tax raaa a A E A A A 136 SCANNING airen a a LO Scanning toat FIP adare SS ean E T E A 138 Creatine SNOrCUTS ca a e a E A ws 138 SCAMMING toan FIP addr ES Sonso N A E eee 139 Understanding FIPOPHONS ernaar E A A aawenaeee 140 SCAN MING tO adCOmMputer or TAS CIV Ena a bsaaeaeniney soi aresaae araaeue ees 142 SC AMIMINS TO a COMPUTE a sas secie ts ey aa scene senate ulin EN E T Seana ae aataeah enone 142 SEANMING TO lt a Tash Arive niren a a a a a a R dete wabdaveseeas 143 Understanding the Scam Center feature Srvaneinrn n aT EA T a iat olenaeien 143 Usine tne Scan Bae WTI orssnonn n A vaoaadivheGiactuveun ak ouiaereaaca whens ea taenaant eae 144 Understanding scari Profe Options enecens neea
101. AppleTalk Zone Select the printer from the list and then click Add vn 0 aan F amp F Setting up serial printing In serial printing data is transferred one bit at a time Although serial printing is usually slower than parallel printing it is the preferred option when there is a great deal of distance between the printer and computer or when an interface with a better transfer rate is not available After installing the serial or communication COM port configure the printer and the computer so they can communicate Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer 1 Setthe parameters in the printer a b c d From the printer control panel navigate to the menu with port settings Locate the menu with serial port settings Make any necessary changes to the serial settings Save the new settings and then print a menu settings page 2 Install the printer driver a Insert the Software and Documentation CD If the installation screen does not appear after a minute then launch the CD manually 1 Click or click Start and then click Run 2 Inthe Start Search or Run box type D setup exe where D is the letter of the CD or DVD drive 3 Press Enter or click OK Click Advanced Options gt Custom Install Follow the instructions on the computer screen From the Configure Printer Connection dialog select Connect through a port discovered on your computer and then select a port
102. Attendance message alert Warning If an error condition occurs then this icon appears A Printer IP address Sample 123 123 123 123 The IP address of your network printer is located at the top left corner of the home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer Using the touch screen buttons Note Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Sample touch screen Sides Duplex Collate _ m A 12 1 ES Copy from Letter 8 5x11 in On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Copy to l 1 sided to 1 sided j i Universal 8 50x14 00 in Plain m P Content Color Text Photo Scale Auto 100 Iii Save As Shortcut Advanced Options To Submit changes made in the printer settings Print a sample copy Touch Submit Sample Copy Understanding the home screen 26 Touch To Right arrow Scroll to the right E gt Left arrow Scroll to the left a Return to the home screen Right increase Select a higher value Left decrease Select a lower value Exit from the current screen Open a context sensitive Help dialog on the touch screen Save a setting Can
103. Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes Note Off is the factory default setting Specifies whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Lets you save e mail addresses as shortcuts Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e mail Destination screen Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 208 Menu item Description Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Best for content 0 5 Mirror Image On Negative Image On Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Scan edge to edge On Sharpness 1 5 Temperature 4 to 4 Use cc bcc On Enables an equal balance of colors in the output Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Create
104. D1877 devant tre install sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse Ce filtre doit tre utilis pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes t l phoniques suisses Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz Fur dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zahlzeichenubertragung Lexmark Teilenummer 14B5109 oder 80D1877 fur jede Leitung installiert werden Uber die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte Ubertragen werden Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind Uso del prodotto in Svizzera Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877 da installare su tutte le linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poich gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera Notice to Users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment Notices 354 Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manu
105. ESS AND CONTRAST SETTINGS The Toner Darkness setting may be too dark the Brightness setting may be too dark or the Contrast setting may be too high e Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu e For Windows users change these settings from Print Properties Troubleshooting 334 e For Macintosh users 1 Choose File gt Print 2 From the Orientation pictures menu choose Printer Features 3 Choose a lower value for the Toner Darkness Brightness and Contrast settings LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder e From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting e For Windows users check this setting from Print Properties For Macintosh users check this setting from the Print dialog Print is too light Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DARKNESS BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST SETTINGS The Toner Darkness setting may be too light the Brightness setting may be too light or the Contrast setting may be too low e Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu e For Windows users change these settings from Print Properties e For Macintosh users 1 Choose File gt Print 2 From the Orient
106. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan e Transmission Log Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log Faxing 135 Holding and forwarding faxes Holding faxes This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup gt Holding Faxes 3 In the Print Faxes Password field enter a password 4 From the Held Fax Mode menu select one of the following Off e Always On e Manual e Scheduled 5 If you selected Scheduled then continue with the following steps a Click Fax Holding Schedule b From the Action menu select Hold faxes c From the Time menu select the time you want the held faxes released d From the Day s menu select the day you want the held faxes released 6 Click Add Forwarding a fax This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number e mail address FTP site or LDSS 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web
107. Feeder Type based on the paper or specialty media loaded Linking and unlinking trays Linking trays Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or for printing multiple copies When one linked tray is empty paper feeds from the next linked tray When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays the trays are automatically linked The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size menu The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu The Paper Type menu and the Paper Size menu are both available from the Paper Size Type menu Unlinking trays Note Trays that do not have the same settings as any other tray are not linked Change one of the following tray settings e Paper Type Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked trays assign a different Paper Type name to the tray such as Custom Type x or define your own custom name e Paper Size Load a different paper size to automatically change the Paper Size setting for a tray Paper Size settings for the multipurpose feeder are not automatic they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu Warning Potential Damage Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe th
108. ION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely Additional printer setup 49 Install the printer and any optional trays or finishers you have purchased in the following order Using a one tray module e Optional 520 sheet tray Tray 2 Printer e 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder Finisher Using a three tray module e Three tray module e Printer e 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder e Finisher Using a tandem tray module e Tandem tray module e Printer e 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder e Finisher For information on installing a one tray module three tray module tandem tray module high capacity feeder or any of the finishers see the setup documentation that came with the option Installing optional trays The printer supports the following optional trays e 1 tray module e 3 tray module e Tandem tray module e High capacity feeder A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely AN CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer
109. L E ET T A E AEN EE S E A S IE ET A A EA T EA E E A ET 113 DAMIKNCSS oiia E A A A A oubiantoua ters 114 Sides DUDICX oerion a a a a a Oe ets ht eh 114 CONE rere Sates E E EA 114 CONTEM rna EA E E E A E A N EEA 114 COON aeaa E a Sass O A a Sone Cian E ukeldadevasteers 114 Advanced ODHUON S enoia E E A E E ERE 115 SIV AS SNOUT arera A E A A AE O 115 E E EEE E E E E LO Getune ready to e mallsss nena A E 116 Contents 5 Setine p the e mail FUNCTION ose islescietewicictscisnaitsanncais endaniacaatieatanisadnwensale dante dan NETE EAR E Ta ai 116 ConneurnNne SAMI Sette S eera a S wiht ataraineaantaee 116 Creating ane Mall SNOrtCU einser a a NEE a T avcuees 117 Creating an e mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Serve ccccccsssccceceeeceeesecceseseeeceeseceesneeeeeeneeeeeees 117 Creating an e mail shortcut using the touch screen xin sesisciviss cenessancsavepinessssatanadernessianwsiuesaaisa needs oudeiawvensaeeieebies 117 Eat a COCUMICIIE reei aa a a en E 118 Sending an e mail USING the touch SCFEEN seront naai ae a T Aa A 118 Sending an e mail using a shortcut number e sessssssssssnsssseessseresereresserosssssssressereresrrreeseresssrssserrssrereserereseress 118 Sending an e mail USING the address DOOK iniieiisnsri tirida Ee A EA A N 118 CUSTOMIZING e maill setting Seians eiie A E shad lansieesnuieeseieneaaecere 119 Adding e mail subject and message information s sssessesserssssessssesssreresereroseresssesssrrressrr
110. LE AML a O18 C menet eae on REO a ea a a ene ene a EET oe en ee oT Te ee 346 POWER CONSUIM DEON icedactececslac EE A de aunencanieie oie eanaceedunealeaaaaeeneecse 350 ENO icsic srecevsstssiceercivasstelswit en casicve he palanieaietsotasteniocienielnats a OL Contents 14 Safety information Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations This product uses a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI Monthly testing of the GFCI is recommended CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Do not recharge disassemble or incinerate a lithium battery Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and local regulations CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage e Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet e Disconnect all cords and cable
111. O WORN DEFECTIVE OR EMPTY TONER CARTRIDGE Replace the worn defective or empty toner cartridge CLEAR THE PAPER PATH AROUND THE TONER CARTRIDGE CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching Clear any paper you see or clean any visible toner from the paper path If the problem persists then contact Customer Support Troubleshooting 339 Streaked vertical lines appear on prints has Try one or more of the following SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER e From the printer control panel Paper menu select Default Source e For Windows users select the paper source from Print Properties e For Macintosh users select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop up menus MMIAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN DEFECTIVE OR EMPTY TONER CARTRIDGE Replace the worn defective or empty toner cartridge CLEAR THE PAPER PATH AROUND THE TONER CARTRIDGE Check the paper path around the toner cartridge Ay CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching Clear any paper you see MAKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Toner fog or background shading appears on the page Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THE TONER CARTRIDGE IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY OR IS NOT DEFECTIVE Reinstall or replace the defective toner
112. ODEN ernennen aea EAA EAEE ETE EATE S ASENET EEE EE 304 SCAN DOCUMENC TOS LON D eanes EE A TT 304 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator ssssesesssesssseersreresrrrssserrssserssserrssereseeressssresseseeee 304 SOME held Jobs Were NOL TEStOl OG neern E a bwaaeeda eau ewavoaLe ere 304 Unsupported dis Kissan ctl esc uals ai a la baci ttt be areca haat ve ssc N a A 304 31 xx Missing OF defective color Calis Oa dpcsaieviasercavescedavarsdevadescesdecanlvesversewniviaswadealpouyenedeedavedessndersierentetiorss 304 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by CEVICE cccsseeccessseceesseeceeeeseeeceaseeceeaeesseaseessseeeeeses 304 34 Incorrect paper size check paper source ccccccssscccceeseccecsececeesececeueececseeeeeseaeececesseeeseaeessaeeeeeneeeesees 304 34 Incorrect paper type check paper SOUPCE asscisssccsisrccessessecenssseweassaavessoansdvessaviedeatersessevevvaresaesenevenetaarveceves 305 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature cccccccssecccseececeeseeeceseseceeeeeceeseeeeecsaseeessaee sees 305 56 Printer SELVICE FO QUIS diarina a a a a a 305 37 Insufficient memory to collate OD saci tase cdats cactnaiadstnavaaedsvasiiacdacveledscvaueasertenec des vcdassstedesnndectediwiasttasieriaveueides 305 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation ccccccsesccccseeeeeeesececceeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeesees 305 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were Aelet
113. Off will hide all color specific menus This setting overrides the Color setting Understanding printer menus 190 A Menu item Sides Duplex 1 sided to 1 sided 1 sided to 2 sided 2 sided to 1 sided 2 sided to 2 sided Paper Saver Off 2 on 1 Portrait 2 on 1 Landscape 4 on 1 Portrait 4 on 1 Landscape Print Page Borders On Collate On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 Punch Off 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes Staple Off Auto Back Dual Dual Double Front Description Specifies whether an original document is duplex two sided or simplex one sided and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex Notes e 1 sided to 1 sided tThe original document has print on one side and the copy will also have print on one side e 1 sided to 2 sided The original document has print on one side while the copy will have print on both sides e 2 sided to 1 sided tThe original document has print on both sides while the copy will have print on just one side e 2 sided to 2 sided The original document has print on both sides and the copy will also have print on both sides Allows copying two or four sheets of a document on one page Note Off is the factory default setting Specifies whether or not a border is printed Note Off is the factory default setting Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies Note On is the factory default setting Spe
114. ScanBack Utility b Select the printer If no printers are listed then contact your system support person or click Setup to manually search for an IP address or host name c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind of output you want to create d Select any of the following e Show MFP Instructions View or print the instructions e Create Shortcut Save this group of settings to use again e Click Finish A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images 2 Scan original documents a Load all pages in the ADF or on the scanner glass b From the printer control panel navigate to Scan Email gt Profiles gt select your scan profile gt Submit Note The output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified Understanding scan profile options Original Size This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes letter and legal size pages Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Color This option enables or disables color for the scanned image Content This option lets y
115. Smooth Rough Envelope Texture Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded Rough Letterhead Texture Specifies the relative texture of the letterhead loaded Normal Rough Smooth Preprinted Texture Specifies the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded Normal Rough Smooth Colored Texture Specifies the relative texture of the colored paper loaded Normal Rough Smooth Light Texture Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded Normal Rough Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting for all paper types except bond rough envelope and rough cotton paper Understanding printer menus 155 Menu item Description Heavy Texture Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded Normal Rough Smooth Rough Cotton Texture Specifies the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded Rough Custom x Texture Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded Normal Note Settings appear only if the custom type is supported Rough Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting for all paper types except bond rough envelope and rough cotton paper Paper Loading menu Card Stock Loading Off Duplex Recycled Loading Off Duplex Glossy Loading Off Duplex Heavy Glossy Loading Off Duplex Labels Loading Off Duplex Vinyl Labels Loading Off Duplex Bond Loading Off Duplex Notes Description Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print j
116. TEMPORARILY DISABLE WEB PROXY SERVERS Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server For more information contact your system support person Contacting customer support When you call customer support describe the problem you are experiencing the message on the display and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution You need to know your printer model type and serial number For more information see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page In the U S or Canada call 1 800 539 6275 For other countries or regions visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Troubleshooting 345 Notices Product information Product name Lexmark X950de 4 x952dte 4 x954dhe 4 Machine type 7558 Model s 032 036 232 236 432 436 Edition notice June 2011 The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This publication could inclu
117. TION Make sure the USB parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board Troubleshooting 328 CHECK THE CABLE Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected Solving paper feed problems Paper frequently jams These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER Use recommended paper and specialty media For more information see the chapter about paper and specialty media guidelines IMIAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the multipurpose feeder CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY e Load paper from a fresh package e Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared CHECK THE PAPER PATH The paper path is not clear Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path and then touch Continue Jammed pages are not reprinted TURN ON JAM RECOVERY 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery 2 Touch the arrows next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears 3 Touch Submit Troubleshooting 329 Solving print quality problems If these suggestions do not correct the p
118. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including fax machines to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine Notices 352 Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients
119. Turn the printer off and wait for 2 seconds before turning the printer back on Remove paper from standard output bin Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin Remove paper from bin x Remove the paper from the specified bin The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from linked set bin name Remove paper from the specified bin The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from all bins Remove the paper from all of the bins The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Restore held jobs Try one or more of the following e Touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk e Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored Troubleshooting 303 Scanner ADF Cover Open The ADF cover is open The message clears when the cover is closed Scan Document Too Long The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages Touch Cancel Job to clear the message SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator An error occurred on the SMTP server or the SMTP server is not configured properly Touch Continue to clear the message If the message appears again cont
120. Understanding printer menus 234 Help menu The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer MFP as PDF files They contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks including copying scanning and faxing English French German and Spanish translations are stored in the printer Other translations are available on the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Menu item Description Print All Guides Prints all the guides Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and changing settings Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings E mail Guide Provides information about sending e mails using addresses shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an FTP address shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies Understanding printer menus 235 Securing the hard disk and other installed memory Statement of Volatility Your printer contains various types of memory that are capable of storing device and network settings informa
121. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Equipment or its transmit antenna that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s Web site www hc sc gc ca rpb The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met Industry Canada Canada Cet appareil est conforme la norme RSS 210 d Industry Canada Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions Suivantes 1 cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d interf rences et 2 il doit accepter toute interf rence re ue y compris celles risquant d alt rer son fonctionnement Notices 355 Cet appareil a t con u pour fonctionner uniquement avec l antenne fournie L utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la r glementation d Industry Canada En application des r glementations d Industry Canada l utilisation d une antenne de gain sup rieur est strictement interdite Pour emp cher toute interf rence radio au service faisant l objet d une licenc
122. YYY ENA Gateway YYY YYY YYY YYY Sets the size of the USB input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes Off is the factory default setting On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes e Auto is the factory default setting On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol Sets the network address information for an external print server Note This menu
123. Zs a a mo Note If an optional ISP is currently installed then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP Additional printer setup 44 To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP a Using a flathead screwdriver loosen the screws b Remove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket and then remove the bracket c Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP and then press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place d Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 45 To install a printer hard disk directly on the system board a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the system board and then press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place Additional printer setup 46 b Use the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 47 Removing a printer hard disk Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touch
124. a n a e tee E T T A I 162 Active NIC NICU oraintsu osa A EE AR EENEN E 162 Standard Network or Network X MENUS nesie isiin ea a a a a aa a eia 162 Network Reports MERU unn E a E E eeaotiaeaou 164 Network Card MeNUsmiscoas ena E E A E ausaeieas ainaaeee 164 TEPIP O A an a a ae ed oe ea ate canes a a a cas eer ste ea a ede a a oeeesets 165 We os VAN UU etnies aca chs enc oats tees O cathe Bates ie A nleotenity aiuto ens cenaays NES 166 WVIFEIESS MICU nner aes saeucuecnsemssaaeetasevsie A A A 167 Appleralik Men snai tasiasttacaits aa wnedp ua hatched tee E E ict tan 167 stanc AG USB MEN Ussien ine a A a taeaaaow an 168 Paralel EMEN ea T A eo 170 Serali meN aiea a a a a a a a 172 SMITP SETUD TTA UT seann e N T T tea ented abseil ecemetean 174 SCV M A Ua A A A A E A E 175 EditiNE SCCUNY SOLUS MENU aeia E E E eneunnaduad ses eaeiadantoneates 175 Miscellaneous Securty Settings mMenu nearen r A TE A 176 COMPGSMUAL Pint menUsereere naea A data aad antics a a aus a a a 177 DEKRWIDNE MENU rn E r A NERE 177 Ssec rity Audit LOR MEn iniia ATA O ame aueuaeean 179 Set Datena HME MENU iiaa a a N a A deduiee Sule 179 SEWN EMO a a a a A ONA 181 General SCENES MEn aie a a a E AON 181 CODY SENE SMENU a E T A E a 190 Fax Settings MENU aea a TEA x cca see ssa E NIIE AR 195 Emal SetiNes MENU si S a AAN 205 PER SUI VS MEN U aa a a AEE OA ERAEN OEE OANE 210 PASM DEVO MENU entenana eiceviesotvaannsvaueuitocusrestunni peut uaniatavaaeutans vice tivaeaiguasdicaban tuuneut
125. act your system support person Some held jobs were not restored Touch Continue to delete the specified job Note Held jobs that are not restored stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible Unsupported disk An unsupported printer hard disk has been installed Remove the unsupported device and then install a supported one 31 xx Missing or defective color cartridge Try one or more of the following 1 Remove and reinstall the specified print cartridge For instructions on removing a print cartridge touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message Note If the message is not cleared then replace the defective print cartridge 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by device Remove the unsupported toner cartridge and then install a supported one 34 Incorrect paper size check paper source Try one or more of the following e Load the appropriate paper or specialty media in the proper tray e Confirm that the wheel on Tray 1 is set to the paper size loaded in the tray Make sure the paper size matches the document you are trying to print e Touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray Check the tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray e Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified on the Print Properties or Print dialog settings Troubleshooting 304 Check that the paper size is correctly set For exampl
126. adding subject line 119 changing output file type 119 configuring e mail settings 116 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 117 creating shortcuts using the touch screen 117 setting up e mail function 116 using a shortcut number 118 using the address book 118 using the touch screen 118 Index 363 F factory defaults restoring 272 FAQ about color printing 342 fax and e mail functions setting up 321 fax and e mail functions are not set up 321 fax connection connecting the printer to the wall jack 125 connecting to a DSL line 126 connecting to a PBX or ISDN 126 fax connections regional adapters 127 fax log viewing 133 Fax memory full 299 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu 195 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu 203 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 300 Fax port 52 fax screen advanced options 135 options 134 135 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 300 Fax Station Name not set up 300 Fax Station Number not set up 300 fax troubleshooting caller ID is not shown 322 can receive but not send faxes 324 can send but not receive faxes 324 cannot send or receive a fax 322 received fax has poor print quality 325 faxing blocking junk faxes 133 canceling a fax job 133 134 changing resolution 132 choosing a fax connection 125 configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time 129 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 129 creating shortcuts using th
127. ae ona anes 214 P GNC Ss CRINE Soari oh a N oped eiciecady ned arate caswaratateuteacenaty E S 219 LON VS MUU axi sat nctastsacioelectsneascetsicn A sdunetievedonnetousantemrenvemesecnces 235 Contents 8 Securing the hard disk and other installed MEMOTY ccccsecsssssseserscsces2 0 SLATCINEMUEOT V OlALINIEY 5c 5 seb avcdonccusseasavinns vedios dasa suacagcsueponsve T samauacounee sannainacleaeeaams EA A 236 Erasing volatile memo y arniarna Le eed sce icant career apne a a 236 Erasing NOn Vole ICT Ol yarei a E T a 237 Erasing printe Nard disk MENON secausticusasteudcveaGonstnnecveapareassietizinudassaheansaaensabeatsavebsamuuseestermancauenas 237 Configuring printer harddisk ENCryPtiON ccccescccseccceceesecceececssceseeecseeeueeeeeceseneeeeeceeeeeenecseeeeseegnes 238 Maintaining the printer sesessessescoscescesoeccsceccecescecoeccecesceceeccecesceseeceeseee 299 Cleaning the exterior OrtheDrINtE Keirina a 239 Cle amine the scanner ClASS tices cis hona a a a T a a ends 240 Cleaning the Printhead lense Sisir i E aoe neice 241 EMON the OIE DUNE DOK orrena a a N 245 ALONE UPPE urena a a a a e en A ea 246 Checking thestatus of parts and SUpDIES ismon nn a a E E 247 Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel sessssssessssseersssesessssssessssssessssseesss 247 Checking the status of parts and supplies from a network COMpUuter ssseeseessssessssresssrersrerersreresssrssseessss 247
128. age containing the PostScript error Note Off is the factory default setting On Lock PS Startup Mode Enables users to disable the SysStart file Note Off is the factory default setting On Font Priority Establishes the font search order Resident Flash Disk Notes Resident is the factory default setting This menu item is available only if a formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read write write or password protected Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100 Image Smoothing Enhances the contrast and sharpness of low resolution images and smooths their color transitions On Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in resolution Understanding printer menus 229 PCL Emul menu Menu item Description Font Source Resident Disk Download Flash All Font Name RO Courier Symbol Set 10U PC 8 12U PC 850 PCL Emulation Settings Point Size 1 00 1008 00 PCL Emulation Settings Pitch 0 08 100 Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item Notes e Resident is the factory default setting It shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded in RAM Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option Make sure the flash option is properly formatted and is not read write or password prot
129. ages through the ADF 1 Remove all original documents from the ADF Note The message clears when the pages are removed from the ADF 2 Open the ADF cover 3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the ADF cover 5 Reload original documents into the ADF straighten the stack and then adjust the paper guide Clearing jams 296 Troubleshooting Understanding printer messages Adjusting color Wait for the process to complete Bin 2 is unable to lower remove paper and check for an obstruction Try one or more of the following e Remove paper and clear any obstruction from the bin e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Change paper source to custom type name Try one or more of the following e Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray e Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to custom type name load orientation Try one or more of the following e Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray e Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in
130. al sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual feed print jobs e First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source Description Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available Notes e All Listed is the factory default setting All available substitutions are allowed e Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed e Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without a Change Paper message appearing Description Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded Note Settings appear only if card stock is supported Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting for all paper types except bond rough envelope and rough cotton paper Understanding printer menus 154 A Menu item Description Glossy Texture Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded Normal Rough Smooth Heavy Glossy Texture Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded Normal Rough Smooth Labels Texture Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded Normal Rough Smooth Bond Texture Specifies the relative texture of the bond paper loaded Rough Smooth Normal Envelope Texture Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded Normal Rough
131. also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Network Setup Page 2 Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected Ifthe statusisNot Connected then the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult a system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Setting up the printer software Installing the printer software For Windows users 1 Close all open software programs 2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD If the installation screen does not appear after a minute then launch the CD manually a Click or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run box type D setup exe where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive c Press Enter or click OK 3 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen For Macintosh users 1 Close all open software applications 2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD and then double click the software installer package 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Using the Internet 1 Goto the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com 2 From the Software menu click Driver Finder 3 Select your product and then select your operating system 4 Download the driver and then install it Updating available options in the printer driver Onc
132. anned image Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Understanding printer menus 204 A Menu item Description Use Multi Page TIFF Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to fax job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes e On is the factory default setting e This menu item applies to all scan functions Enable Analog Receive Enables analog fax receive Note Off is the factory default setting On E mail Settings menu Menu item Description E mail Server Setup Specifies e mail server information Subject Message Notes Base leiname e The subject box has a limitation of 255 characters e The message box has a limitation of 512 characters E mail Server Setup Sends a copy of the e mail back to the sender Send me a copy Note Never appears is the factory default setting Never appears On by default Off by default Always On E mail Server Setup Specifies the maximum e mail size in kilobytes Max E mail size Note E mails above the specified size are not sent 0 65535 KB E mail Server Setup Sends a message when an e mail is greater than the configured size limit Size error message E mail Server Setup Specifies a domai
133. ansparencies Note Avoid scratching or touching the print side Loading paper and specialty media 80 4 Push the paper pick tab and then load the paper or specialty media Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop and then release the paper pick tab Warning Potential Damage Pulling the paper out without pushing the paper pick tab first may cause jams or the paper pick tab to break e Load paper and transparencies with the recommended print side facedown and the short edge entering the printer first e For duplex letterhead printing place the letterhead faceup and the header entering the printer last e Load envelopes with the flap side up and to the right Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer Notes Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper or transparencies under the stack height limiter e Load only one size and type of paper at a time Loading paper and specialty media 81 5 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the stack Make sure the paper or specialty media fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder lies flat and is not bent or wrinkled 6 From the printer control panel set the Paper Size and Paper Type for the multipurpose feeder MP Feeder Size and MP
134. aple Cartridges 3 pack Staples G5 25A0013 Advanced Booklet Staples Staples G11 and Staples G12 21Z0357 Maintaining the printer 248 Ordering a maintenance kit When x Maintenance Kit appears on the printer display order the indicated maintenance kit to replace the worn parts All maintenance kit parts except that in the 480K maintenance kit are designed to be user replaceable The kits come with instructions Recommended maintenance kits and part numbers Maintenance kit Service part number 320K 110 V Maintenance Kit 40X7550 320K 220 V Maintenance Kit 40X7569 480K Maintenance Kit 40X7560 Replacing parts and supplies Replacing a maintenance kit 1 Replace the maintenance kit 2 Reset the maintenance count to zero to clear the 80 scheduled maintenance x message Note For more information on replacing the maintenance kit and resetting the maintenance count see the instruction sheets that came with the maintenance kit Replacing a photoconductor unit 1 Open the front door Maintaining the printer 249 2 Rotate the release lever counterclockwise to open the cover 3 Lower the cover Warning Potential Damage To avoid overexposing the photoconductor unit do not leave the door open for more than 10 minutes Maintaining the printer 250 4 Grasp the handle of the photoconductor unit and pull it out of the machine 5 Unpack the replacement photoconductor unit 6 Align and insert the e
135. appears TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax Call your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting Voice MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions To enable both Voice Mail and the printer to answer calls you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL 1 Dial the fax number 2 Scan the original document one page at a time Troubleshooting 323 Can send but not receive faxes Try one or more of the following LOAD PAPER If the tray is empty then load paper in the tray or feeder CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone rings before the printer answers If you have extension phones on the same line as the printer or subscribe to the telephone company s Distinctive Ring service then keep the Ring Delay setting at 4 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt
136. arging CODIES ossos iasaieneis na r Enr a E NE NEA EEES ANANE E EANAN AEAN CEATA EESE 109 AGUSTIN G CODY guall aruna e a A E R uetaid aden dane 109 CONatNe CODIE aa a A a Sedo tusnee eeilewumnbeoneneeaeratbed 110 Placing separator sheets between COPIES csccseccsscssccsecsscsecsssesseesseeseesseeseessceseesceeseesceseesscesenescessscseesssess 110 COpying m ltiple Pages ONTO asingle Shet aiiicsiiccsdisasicasuussih deawsdabiseadenes a a a 111 Creatine a custom CODY JOD JOD DUIE recurren a a T 111 Placing miormaton Ol COp ESen n a a a aa ad Gace eageee ss 112 Placing the date and time at the top Of each page s ssssssssssssssserssrersrrresserresssesssrrrssrrrereresssessseseeeereserees 112 Placing an Overlay message on Gach pale asorar iran rnan E A 112 Canceling A CODY JOD arira oan a O E 112 Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF cccsssscecsssseccessececeseeeceeseecsesseccsenececseeeeseaeeesees 112 Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glaSS ss nossseesseereseeressresssrsssrrerereressereesseesse 112 Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed sessssssseesseeersserssssrsssersssssressreresreessseesssessseeeresssseesss 113 Understanding the c py screens and OPtiONS si arrire anna aaa ia aa r s 113 COV OM aeo E E E nego A IA tone eunianotaat tees 113 COPY TO EEE EE A E E EE A ee ee eee emer ere 113 CODICE aanita E EE A a N E tearaceteidenaatentate ts 113 EE e
137. arriage return CR control command Note Off is the factory default setting Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays drawers and feeders Notes e Off is the factory default setting e None ignores the Select Paper Feed command This selection is displayed only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter e 0 199 allows a custom setting to be assigned Understanding printer menus 231 Menu item Description Displays the factory default setting assigned to each tray drawer or feeder Tray Renumber View Factory Defaults MPF Default 8 T1 Default 1 T2 Default 4 T3 Default 5 T4 Default 20 T5 Default 21 Env Default 6 MPaper Default 2 MEnv Default 3 Tray Renumber Returns all tray drawer and feeder assignments to the factory default settings Restore Defaults Yes No HTML menu Description Sets the default font for HTML documents Menu Item Font Name Joanna MT Albertus MT Antique Olive Apple Chancery Arial MT Avant Garde Bodoni Bookman Chicago Clarendon Cooper Black Copperplate Coronet Courier Eurostile Garamond Geneva Gill Sans Goudy Helvetica Hoefler Text Intl CG Times Intl Courier Intl Univers Letter Gothic Lubalin Graph Marigold MonaLisa Recut Monaco New CenturySbk New York Optima Oxford Palatino StempelGaramond Taffy Times TimesNewRoman Univers Zapf Chancery NewSa
138. ash the network firmware in the printer or print server 55 Unsupported option in slot x 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board and then replace it with a supported card 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Troubleshooting 307 56 Parallel port x disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the parallel port e Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Serial port x disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the serial port e Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is not set to Disabled 56 Standard USB port disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the USB port e Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Standard parallel port disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the parallel port e Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 USB port x disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer di
139. at caused the damages This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable INNO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS INCIDENTAL DAMAGE OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES Notices 359 This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark Lexmark s and its Suppliers and Remarketers limitations of remedies are not cumulative Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation Additional rights Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED NOTICE Contains Flash Flash Lite and or Reader technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated This Product contains Adobe Flash player software under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated Copyright 1995 2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC All rights reserved Adobe Reader and F
140. ate or unknown printer 7 Touch gt Copy It Collating copies If you print multiple copies of a document then you can choose to print each copy as a set collated or to print the copies as groups of pages not collated Collated Not collated 123 233 By default Collate is set to On If you do not want to collate your copies then change the setting to Off 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt enter the number of copies gt Collate gt Off gt gt Copy It Placing separator sheets between copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Separator Sheets No
141. ation pictures drop down menu choose Printer Features 3 Choose a higher value for the Toner Darkness Brightness and Contrast settings LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Troubleshooting 335 AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder e From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting e For Windows users check this setting from Print Properties e For Macintosh users check this setting from the Print dialog Printer is printing blank pages Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed Reinstall the cartridge MAKE SURE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four cartridges 1 Remove the cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the cartridge Note If print quality does not improve then replace the cartridge of the color
142. ats can withstand up to 25 psi 172 kPa pressure without delaminating oozing around the edges or releasing hazardous fumes Do not use labels with slick backing material Use full label sheets Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing resulting in a jam Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive and could void the printer and cartridge warranties Do not use labels with exposed adhesive Printing 101 Do not print within 1 mm 0 04 in of the edge of the label of the perforations or between die cuts of the label Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm 0 04 in away from edges is recommended Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty e If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible then remove a 1 6 mm 0 06 in strip on the leading and driver edge and use a non oozing adhesive e Portrait orientation works best especially when printing bar codes Tips on using card stock Card stock is heavy single ply specialty media Many of its variable characteristics such as moisture content thickness and texture can significantly impact print quality Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities e From the Paper menu set the Paper Type to Card Stock e Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting Be aware that preprinting perfo
143. ax gt Open Print Queue 2 From the printer window select the print job you want to cancel 3 From the icon bar at the top of the window click the Delete icon In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From the Finder navigate to Go gt Applications 2 Double click Utilities gt Print Center or Printer Setup Utility 3 Double click the printer icon 4 From the printer window select the print job you want to cancel 5 From the icon bar at the top of the window click the Delete icon Printing 104 Copying Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Making copies Making a quick copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Adjust the paper guides when loading a document into the ADF Note Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same Failure to set the proper size may result to a cropped image 3 From the printer control panel press to start copying Copying using the ADF 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF Note Do not load postcards phot
144. becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark The replacement may be a new or repaired item The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced altered in need of a repair not included in warranty service damaged beyond repair or if the product is not free of all legal obligations restrictions liens and encumbrances Before you present this product for warranty service remove all print cartridges programs data and removable storage media unless directed otherwise by Lexmark For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web at http support lexmark com Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee Extent of limited warranty Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by Modification or unauthorized attachments Accidents misuse abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user s guides manuals instructions or guidance Unsuitable physical or operating environment Maintenanc
145. been cleared Notes e Single pass is the factory default setting e Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to turn the printer off for an extended amount of time e Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass method Allows the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first Notes e Single pass is the factory default setting e Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass method only Allows the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first Note Single pass is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 178 Security Audit Log menu Menu item Export Log Delete Log Yes No Configure Log Enable Audit Enable Remote Syslog Remote Syslog Server Remote Syslog Port Remote Syslog Method Remote Syslog Facility Log full behavior Admin s e mail address Digitally sign exports Severity of events to log Remote Syslog non logged events E mail log cleared alert E mail log wrapped alert E mail full alert full alert level E mail log exported alert E mail log settings changed alert Log line endings Set Date and Time menu Menu item Description Enables an authorized user to export the security log Notes e To export the log from the printer control panel a flash drive must be attached to the printer e From
146. can Sizes 159 Custom Types 158 Default Source 150 diagram of 147 Disk Wiping 177 Edit Security Setups 175 E mail Settings 205 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup 195 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup 203 Finishing 222 Flash Drive 214 FTP Settings 210 General Settings 181 Help 235 HTML 232 Image 233 IPv6 166 Job Accounting 221 Miscellaneous 176 Network x 162 Network Card 164 Network Reports 164 Paper Loading 156 Paper Size Type 151 Paper Texture 154 Parallel x 170 PCL Emul 230 PDF 229 PostScript 229 Quality 224 Reports 161 Security Audit Log 179 Serial x 172 Set Date Time 179 Settings 219 SMTP Setup menu 174 Index 365 XPS 229 menus diagram 147 Miscellaneous menu 176 moving the printer 18 270 multipurpose feeder loading 79 My MFP setting up 31 N Network x menu 162 Network Card menu 164 network options 35 Network Reports menu 164 network setup page printing 54 Networking Guide where to find 271 noise emission levels 348 non volatile memory 236 erasing 237 notices 347 348 349 350 351 353 354 355 356 357 O optional 1 150 sheet tray loading 75 optional 850 sheet tray loading 75 options 1 tray module installing 50 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder installing 50 3 tray module installing 50 firmware card 39 firmware cards 35 flash memory card 39 Internal Solutions Port installing 41 list 35 memory card installing 37 memory cards 35 network 35 order of ins
147. cartridge MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the worn or defective transfer module MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the word or defective photoconductor unit Troubleshooting 340 IMIAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the worn or defective fuser MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS RECALIBRATED RECENTLY Perform color adjust from the Quality menu MMIAKE SURE THE APPLICATION HAS NOT SPECIFIED AN OFF WHITE BACKGROUND Check the application settings MAKE SURE NO TONER IS IN THE PAPER PATH Contact customer support Toner rubs off Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings Change the Paper Weight setting from Normal to Heavy 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setting e For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog CHECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING From the printer control panel Paper menu make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder If necessary change the Paper Texture setting from Normal to Rough IMIAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the worn or def
148. ccurred then the printer ignores the flash drive e If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs then Busy appears After these print jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any network adapter any connector the memory device or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing reading or writing from the memory device A loss of data can occur Printing 98 2 From the printer control panel touch the document you want to print 3 Touch the arrows to increase the number of copies to print and then touch Print Notes e Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing e If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then you can still print files from the flash drive as held jobs Supported flash drives and file types JENAR aie File type e Lexar JumpDrive 2 0 Pro 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes Documents e SanDisk Cruzer Mini 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes pdf e Xps e html Images Notes e Hi Speed USB flash drives must support the full speed standard Devices supporting only USB low speed capabilities are not supported dcx e USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table FAT system Devices formatted with New Technology File System NTFS or any other file
149. ce 1999 5 ES Deutsch Hiermit erkl rt Lexmark International Inc dass sich das Ger t dieses Ger t in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet 2YMMOP QNETAI MPO TI OYZIOAEI2 ANAITH2ZEI2 KAI TI AOINE 2XETIKE2 AIATA El2 TH OAHTIA 1999 5 EK English Hereby Lexmark International Inc declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC EAAnvikh ME THN NAPOYZA H LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC AHAQNEI OTI AYTO TO NPOION Espa ol Por medio de la presente Lexmark International Inc declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Eesti K esolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International Inc et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999 5 EU pohinouetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele s tetele Suomi Lexmark International Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett t m tuote on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sit koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen Fran ais Par la pr sente Lexmark International Inc d clare que l appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Magyar Alul rott Lexmark International Inc nyilatkozom hogy a term k
150. ceceescesseescessueeeseaueceesaaeeessaasuageeeees 329 lammed pieces are NOL reprinted aaia aR a A ee NaeweaOnaaaas 329 SOWING print duality DEODIEN IS xesich tovacincsenceevs i e E ATA a E TOOT 330 Characters havejagced or UNEVEN CARES nriomiieian a nE E ER E E E AT A 330 clipped Mage S nmn ea a ANN 330 Fine horizontal lines appear on color pag s sierveren aaan EAEE A NAT R vaneendevasaanwe evr 330 Shadow images appear on DIOS egnir A EA T ETN 331 Gray FO AIK SF OUING sath ecetsteviis veces E Aa 331 Contents 13 I COFECU Ia EIS ernes iA sates siesta easieeveny aid sane ade EAEE NEEE OTENE 332 Light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears ON prints cceeeeceeeeseceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 332 NETE EEI a PEE AEE ey Sta et es AEA a beta Ol wre fou ae ian Sea es accuse oan EE castes elu serosa amen E 333 PLE Whe UN AUIGIOS cwscttct nee duasatstav citatana te talesirestunetavietelseann E E 333 PEIAUIS TOO COUN oira o A de Aue tlesee touee EA 334 PEAT 1S TOOTE N sess tecevaceoaseressioeservisttewtas ca a aaenGia vse ue data aee en cieuvehanaohtaee eee 335 Printeris prnine Dla Kk pates seisne n EA verdes nuatectatedmuewarleasadenaiheavebanveenwalsonsivdvetantwuneles 336 Repeating defects appear ona Dage sissie onn ea EA A AA E 336 SEW CLM Ml a a eis Ma ec ne gt sco ettostotnahe acters 337 SONL COOL FSS sass tteascrtsc ceca osian aise E ota eet bales tale E AE ses ecoaatonivadl va douncual E NEE 338 Black or white streaks
151. ceeeccesseeeseceeececsecseeceseeceeaeeeeeeetens 75 L adine the 2000 sheet MISh Capacity Teede raiceiras tiers eas baeentitees E dacrace ness 77 LOAGINE THe MUIBIDUT DOSE fOCOE rmen a E E 79 LAKID aNd UNUNKNE ER AVS ennnen cous inant a a O EE TE 82 OKIN NAYS a E N a esa an ead aoe 82 WIERD EIV aonn T T A NS 82 Contents 3 Creating a custom name for a paper type a civwscacicaiailccaniessuaweaievnectoecwadeadalaciaesn wil eseadesanleadvetinievverteaniudiocsabinindeas 83 Assigning a custom pap r type NAME vieiiwecwss aes vaseswnisay irse eievnnceuss sasandeless ES EESN NENAS AOSE SEENEN ETENEE EEEa DEE 83 Conneurihe a custom NaMe arsa a A a a A 83 Paper and specialty media guidelines s sssssessesssessesessoessessssosseessesseesss D Pa CC UICC NCS A A E A E 84 Papercharacteri stis oine a a S 84 Unacceptable Papeieren uenea E E E T E A a 85 Selecting Paper asorar a e TE E R A A 85 Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead ccecccessecsseccseceesececeneceeeseceesecesceceecceeeeceeeuceseueceeaseeeceeseneeeees 85 Using recycled paper and Other office papers csiccsesiscesitiwsiiven accvsenadeds idesaavan NEON NEEE EEE 86 SEOINE AEM oaia Sccala aces vacsaacmsesnsie a a aecanuacen mi otuancieen siek ais Hausa a cde aa 87 Supported paper SIZES types and WelghtSeennonniniarseieni a T a NaS 88 Supported Paper cy 14 pan es re Pt er E E E O 88 SUPPOFTEd paper types and WEISNTS cess sacstacsessaderansecaseneces cobgeaesesavaaadsigvai
152. cel e Cancel an action or a selection Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes Understanding the home screen 27 Reset values on the screen Understanding the home screen 28 Setting up and using the home screen applications Notes e Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded applications Some applications are supported only on select printer models e There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase To learn more visit www lexmark com Or inquire at your point of purchase Accessing the Embedded Web Server The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer 1 Obtain the printer IP address e From the printer control panel home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu e By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field The Embedded Web Server page appears Showing or hiding icons on the home screen 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address
153. cies or paper N A BC DEF A DHF Try one or more of the following ENSURE THAT THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT If the fill pattern is incorrect choose a different fill pattern from your software program CHECK THE PAPER TYPE e Use only the recommended transparencies Ensure that the Paper Type setting matches what is loaded in the tray or feeder e Ensure that the Paper Texture setting is correct for the type of paper or specialty media loaded in the tray or feeder Troubleshooting 338 MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print cartridge 1 Remove the print cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the print cartridge If the problem continues the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact Customer Support Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Try one or more of the following SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER e From the printer control panel Paper Menu select Default Source e For Windows users select the paper source from Print Properties e For Macintosh users select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop up menus MAKE SURE THERE IS N
154. cifies the type of hole punch finishing to be used in a print or copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Lets you enable or disable the staple finisher Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu only appears when a staple finisher is installed Understanding printer menus 191 f Menu item Description Original Size Specifies the paper size of the original document Letter Legal Notes e Letter is the US factory default setting Executive Tabloid e A4 is the international factory default setting Folio Statement Universal 4x 6 in 3x 5in Business Card ID Card Custom Scan Size x A3 A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Copy To Source Specifies the paper source for copy jobs Tray x Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Auto Size Match Manual Feeder Transparency Separators Places a sheet of paper between transparencies Note On is the factory default setting Separator Sheets Places a sheet of paper between pages copies or jobs Off Note Off is the factory default setting Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Separator Sheet Source Specifies the separator sheet source Tray x Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Manual Feeder Darkness Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job 1 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 192 Menu item D
155. consumption disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet Total energy usage It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode s energy usage Industry Canada compliance statement This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Avis de conformit aux normes de l industrie du Canada Cet appareil num rique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux quipements pouvant causer des interf rences NMB 003 European Community EC directives conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC and 2006 95 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower IIl 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of
156. ctive projector must be used then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1 2 or 3 will lighten the transparency Make sure to print on the recommended type of color transparencies What is manual color correction When manual color correction is enabled the printer employs user selected color conversion tables to process objects However Color Correction must be set to Manual or no user defined color conversion will be implemented Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed text graphics or images and how the color of the object is specified in the software program RGB or CMYK combinations Notes e Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating system controls the adjustment of colors e The color conversion tables applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto generate preferred colors for the majority of documents To manually apply a different color conversion table 1 From the Quality menu select Color Correction and then select Manual 2 From the Quality menu select Manual Color and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the affected object type Troubleshooting 343 Manual Color menu RGB Image Vivid Produces brighter more saturated colors and may be applied RGB Text to all
157. d by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF gt Scan to Network 3 Specify the destinations and then customize the settings 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen and then follow the instructions on the printer display Setting up My MFP Icon Description The application lets you customize your touch screen settings and store those preferences in a flash drive Each time you want to copy fax or scan insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer All your personal preferences are automatically uploaded including job settings home screen preferences and address book Note The icon appears only when a flash drive with My MFP settings is inserted into the USB port of the printer To set up My MFP insert a flash drive into the USB port of the printer and then follow the instructions on the printer display to run the setup wizard To use My MFP insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer when you want to copy fax or scan Understanding WS Scan Icon Description The Web Services Scan application lets you scan documents at the network printer and then send the scanned image to your computer WS Scan is a Microsoft application that is similar to Scan to Network but has the capability of sending the scanned image to a Windows based application To learn more about WS Scan see the Microsoft documen
158. d network port menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Factory Defaults gt Restore Now gt Submit Administrative support 272 Clearing jams Carefully select paper and specialty media and load it properly to avoid most jams If jams do occur follow the steps outlined in this section Note Jam recovery is set to Auto by default The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks Avoiding jams Paper tray recommendations Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing Do not load a tray while the printer is printing Load it prior to printing or wait for a prompt to load it Do not load too much paper Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes Push the tray in firmly after loading paper Paper recommendations Use only recommended paper or specialty media Do not load wrinkled creased damp bent or curled paper Flex and straighten paper before loading it Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes weights or type
159. ddress book feature is not enabled then contact your system support person 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt gt Browse shortcuts 4 Using the virtual keyboard type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find Note Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time 5 Touch Done gt Fax It Faxing 131 Customizing fax settings Changing the fax resolution Settings range from Standard fastest speed to Ultra Fine slowest speed best quality 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options 4 From the Resolution area touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want 5 Touch Fax It Making a fax lighter or darker 1 Load an original docu
160. de technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in later editions Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time References in this publication to products programs or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates Any reference to a product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products programs or services except those expressly designated by the manufacturer are the user s responsibility For Lexmark technical support visit support lexmark com For information on supplies and downloads visit www lexmark com If you don t have access to the Internet you can contact Lexmark by mail Lexmark International Inc Bldg 004 2 CSC 740 New Circle Road NW Lexington KY 40550 USA 2010 Lexmark International Inc All rights reserved Notices 346 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense
161. default setting e Max Speed Prints in color unless Black Only is selected in the driver Prints in black only if the Black Only driver setting is selected e Max Yield Switches from black to color based on the color content found on each page Frequent color mode switching can result in slower printing if the content of pages is mixed Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Configuration gt Print Settings gt Setup Menu 3 From the Printer Usage list select Max Speed or Max Yield 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 Navigate to gt Settings gt Print Settings gt Setup Menu 2 From the Printer Usage list select Max Speed or Max Yield 3 Touch Submit Printing 97 Printing from a flash drive Printing from a flash drive Notes Before printing an encrypted PDF file enter the file password from the printer control panel e You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions 1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port Notes e If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has o
162. default setting The printer chooses between portrait and landscape Specifies that multiple page images be printed on one side of a paper Notes e Off is the factory default setting e The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side Prints a border on each page image Note None is the factory default setting Specifies the positioning of multiple page images Notes e Horizontal is the factory default setting e Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Understanding printer menus 218 Separator Sheets Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted Off Between Copies Notes Betweendobs e Off is the factory default setting Between Pages e Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document Separator Sheet Source Specifies the paper source for separator sheets Tray x Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Manual Feeder Blank Pages Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print N
163. detected 306 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 306 53 Unformatted flash detected 307 54 Network x software error 307 54 Serial option x error 307 54 Standard network software error 307 55 Unsupported option in slot x 307 56 Parallel port x disabled 308 56 Serial port x disabled 308 56 Standard parallel port disabled 308 56 Standard USB port disabled 308 56 USB port x disabled 308 58 Too many disks installed 308 58 Too many flash options installed 309 58 Too many trays attached 309 59 Incompatible tray x 309 61 Remove defective disk 309 62 Disk full 309 63 Unformatted disk 309 80 Replace fuser 310 80 Replace paper pick rollers in paper source 310 80 Scanner maintenance required use ADF kit 310 80 Scheduled maintenance x 310 80 xx Fuser life warning 310 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle 310 82 xx Waste toner bottle missing 310 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full 311 83 xx Transfer module missing 311 84 Replace black pc unit 249 84 Replace color pc units 249 84 unsupported color photoconductor 311 84 xx color photoconductor low 311 84 xx color photoconductor missing 311 84 xx color photoconductor nearly low 311 Index 367 84 xx Replace color photoconductor 311 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin 313 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 313 88 2x Replace color cartridge 311 88 xx color car
164. displayed on the upper left and right corners of Left side the home screen Right side For the Left side and Right side menus choose from the following Custom Text x options None IP Address Hostname text entry x Cartridge x Photoconductor Fuser Contact Name Location Date Time mDNS DDNS Service Name Zero Configuration Name Transfer Module Cartridge Level Custom Text x For x Cartridge x Photoconductor Fuser and Transfer Module choose from the following options When to display Do not display Display Message to Display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate text entry Notes IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side Date Time is the factory default setting for Right side Off is the factory default setting for Display When Supply Registers Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to Display Understanding printer menus 184 Menu item Description Displayed Information continued Specifies what is displayed for Paper Jam Load Paper and Service Waste Toner Bottle Errors Available options for each button are Paper Jam Activate Load Paper Yes Service Errors No Type of Message to Display Default Alternate Default Message text entry Alternate Message text entry Notes e No is the factory default setting for Activate e Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to Display Home screen customiza
165. dniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s A Lexmark International Inc declara que este este produto est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Diretiva 1999 5 CE Slovensky Lexmark International Inc t mto vyhlasuje e tento produkt sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia smernice 1999 5 ES relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES H rmed intygar Lexmark International Inc att denna produkt st r i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga Lexmark International Inc izjavlja da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Statement of Limited Warranty Lexmark X950de 4 x952dte 4 x954dhe 4 Lexmark International Inc Lexington KY This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada For customers outside the U S refer to the country specific warranty information that came with your product This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use and not for resale from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer referred to in this statement as Remarketer Limited warranty Lexmark warrants that this product lIs manufactured from new parts or new and serviceable used parts which perform like new parts lIs during normal use free from defects in material and
166. dvanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings e Advanced Duplex Use to specify the document orientation whether documents are one sided or two sided and how documents are bound Note Some Advanced Duplex options are available only on select printers e Advanced Imaging Use to change or adjust Auto Center Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you copy the document e Create Booklet Use to create a booklet You can choose between 1 sided and 2 sided Note This option appears only when a print duplexer and printer hard disk are installed e Cover Page Setup Use to set copy cover page and booklet cover page e Custom Job Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job e Edge Erase Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan e Header Footer Use to turn on Date Time Page number Bates number or Custom text and prints them in the specified header or footer location e Margin Shift Use to increase the size of the margin of a specified distance by shifting the scanned image This can be usef
167. e Accessing the system board on page 36 2 Remove the printer hard disk For more information see Removing a printer hard disk on page 48 3 Unpack the ISP kit Additional printer setup 41 4 Use the provided screws to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP solution Additional printer setup 42 6 Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the receptacle of the system board 7 Firmly connect the ISP solution to the system board cage using two screws Additional printer setup 43 Installing a printer hard disk Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 36 2 Unpack the printer hard disk 3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board et ae a a a a a oe Aa Z a rh z
168. e 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes Offset Pages None Between Copies Between Jobs Quality menu Print Mode Color Black Only Description Specifies whether the prints are stapled Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a stapler is installed Specifies whether the prints have punched holes Note This menu appears only when a puncher is installed Determines the type of punch finishing performed on a printed output Notes e 2 holes is the factory default setting regardless of hardware e 3 holes and 4 holes appear only when their respective hole punch hardware is installed Offsets pages at certain instances Notes e None is the factory default setting Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off each set of printed pages are offset such as all page 1 s and all page 2 s Between Jobs sets the same offset position for the entire print job regardless of the number of copies printed This menu appears only when a stapler is installed Description Specifies whether images are printed in color or in black and white Notes e Color is the factory default setting e The printer driver is capable of overriding this setting Understanding printer menus 224 Menu item Description Color Correction Auto Off Manual Print Resolution 2400 Image Q 1200 dpi Toner Darkness 1 5 En
169. e cet appareil doit tre utilis a l int rieur et loin des fen tres afin de garantir une protection optimale Si le mat riel ou son antenne d mission est install a l ext rieur il doit faire l objet d une licence L installateur de cet quipement radio doit veiller a ce que l antenne soit implant e et dirig e de mani re a n mettre aucun champ HF d passant les limites fix es pour l ensemble de la population par Sant Canada Reportez vous au Code de s curit 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Sant Canada www hc sc gc ca rpb Le terme IC pr c dant le num ro de d accr ditation inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industry Canada Notice to users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill
170. e if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed Cancel the print job 34 Incorrect paper type check paper source Try one or more of the following e Load the appropriate paper or specialty media in the proper tray e Confirm that the wheel on Tray 1 is set to the paper type loaded in the tray Make sure the paper type matches the document you are trying to print Touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray Check the tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray e Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified on the Print Properties or Print dialog settings Check that the paper type is correctly set For example if the MP Feeder Type is set to Universal then make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed Cancel the print job 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing e To enable Resource Save after receiving this message make sure the link buffers are set to Auto and then exit the menus to activate the link buffer changes When Ready appears enable Resource Save Install additional memory 36 Printer service required Touch Continue to clear the message or contact customer support 37 Insufficient memory to collate job Try one or mor
171. e by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications Refurbishment repair refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products supplies or parts Products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD ALL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS PRICES AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE Limitation of liability Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph Lexmark s liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product th
172. e factory default setting e Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported by the tray Bin Setup menu Description Output Bin Specifies the default exit bin Standard Bin Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x Configure Bins Specifies configuration options for exit bins Mailbox Link Link Optional Notes Mailbox is the factory default setting This setting treats each bin as a separate mailbox Type Assignment Link configures all available bins as one large exit bin Link Optional links together all available exit bins except the standard bin and only appears when at least two optional bins are installed Type Assignment assigns each paper type to an output bin or linked bin set Bins assigned the same name are automatically linked unless Link Optional is selected Overflow Bin Specifies an alternate exit bin when a designated bin is full Standard Bin Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x Understanding printer menus 160 A Menu item Description Assign Type Bin Selects an exit bin for each supported paper type Plain Paper Bin Available selections for each type are Card Stock Bin Disabled Transparency Bin Standard Bin Recycled Bin Bin x Glossy Bin Note Disabled is the factory default setting Heavy Glossy Bin Labels Bin Bond Bin Envelope Bin Rough Envelope Bin Letterhead Bin Preprinted Bin Colored Bin Light Pap
173. e fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down and i while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully powered up the touch screen displays a list of functions instead of the standard home screen icons 3 Touch Wipe All Settings The printer will reboot several times during this process Note Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings solutions jobs faxes and passwords on the printer 4 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Erasing printer hard disk memory Note Your printer may not have a hard disk installed Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus enables you to remove residual confidential material left by scan print copy and fax jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down AA and AEs while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully powered up the touch screen displays a list of functions instead of the standard home screen icons 3 Touch Wipe Disk and the
174. e for landscape Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Notes e Best for content is the factory default setting e 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened e 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large e This menu applies to all scan functions Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Sets the quality of a text photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 211 Menu item Description Photo Default 5 90 Use Multi Page TIFF Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Log Paper Source Tray x Manual Feeder Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x FTP bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Base File Name Custom Job Scanning Background Removal 4 to 4 Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 50 is the factory default setting Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes e On is the factory defa
175. e of the following e Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job Cancel the current print job 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing e Delete fonts macros and other data in printer memory Install additional printer memory Troubleshooting 305 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs Touch Continue to clear the message 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk Touch Continue to clear the message 38 Memory full Try one or more of the following Touch Cancel job to clear the message e Install additional printer memory 39 Complex page some data may not have printed Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Cancel the current print job e Install additional printer memory 40 color invalid refill change cartridge Replace the specified cartridge to continue printing 51 Defective flash detected Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing e Cancel the current print job 52 Not enough f
176. e the printer software and any options are installed it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs Additional printer setup 54 For Windows users 1 O uu A W N Open the printers folder a Click or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run box type control printers c Press Enter or click OK Select the printer Right click the printer and then select Properties Click the Configuration tab Click Update Now Ask Printer or manually add any installed hardware options under Configuration Options Click Apply For Macintosh users In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 2 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax gt select your printer gt Options amp Supplies gt Driver Add any installed hardware options and then click OK In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 U A W N From the Finder navigate to Go gt Applications gt Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center Select your printer From the Printers menu choose Show Info Add any installed hardware options and then click Apply Changes Setting up wireless printing Note A Service Set Identifier SSID is a name assigned to a wireless network Wireless Encryption Protocol WEP and Wi Fi Protected Access WPA are types of security used on a network Information you will need to set up the printer
177. e touch screen 129 distinctive ring service 127 fax setup 124 forwarding faxes 136 holding faxes 136 making a fax lighter or darker 132 sending a fax 130 sending a fax at a scheduled time 132 sending using the touch screen 130 setting the date and time 128 setting the fax number or station number 128 setting the outgoing fax name or Station name 128 viewing a fax log 133 FCC notices 348 351 355 features Scan Center 143 fiber optic network setup 60 finding more information about the printer 17 finisher exit bins 95 finishing features 92 supported paper sizes 92 Finishing menu 222 firmware card installing 39 flash drive printing from 98 Flash Drive menu 214 flash drives supported file types 99 flash memory card installing 39 troubleshooting 328 font sample list printing 103 Forms and Favorites setting up 30 forwarding faxes 136 FTP scanning using address book 139 FTP address creating shortcuts using the touch screen 139 FTP screen advanced options 142 options 140 141 FTP Settings menu 210 G General Settings menu 181 Green settings Eco Mode 67 Quiet Mode 67 green settings Hibernate Mode 69 H held jobs 102 printing from a Macintosh computer 103 printing from Windows 103 Help menu 235 Hibernate Mode using 69 hiding icons on the home screen 29 holding faxes 136 hole punch box emptying 245 home screen hiding icons 29 showing icons 29 home screen buttons and icons description 24 HTML menu 23
178. e type of paper loaded in a tray The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type Prints may not be properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected Loading paper and specialty media 82 Creating a custom name for a paper type If the printer is on a network you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type x for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Name gt type a name gt Submit Note This custom name will replace the Custom Type x name under the Custom Types and Paper Size and Type menus 3 Click Custom Types gt select a paper type gt Submit Assigning a custom paper type name Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a custom paper type name gt select a tray gt Submit Configuring a custom name If the printer is on a network then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type x
179. earing jams 278 2 Pull the green lever down Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Clearing jams 279 4 Push the green lever back into place 5 Close door A 6 If necessary touch Continue from the printer control panel 24x paper jam Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed when pulling out any jammed paper Clearing jams 280 Paper jam in Tray 1 1 Open Tray 1 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out 3 Close Tray 1 4 If necessary touch Continue jam cleared from the printer control panel Clearing jams 281 Paper jam in one of the optional trays Trays 2 4 1 Check door C and then firmly grasp the jammed paper and then pull it out 2 Open the specified tray 3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out 4 Close the tray 5 If necessary touch Continue jam cleared from the printer control panel Clearing jams 282 Paper jam in Tray 5 high capacity feeder Paper jam inside the tray 1 Pull out the tray until it stops Warning Potential Damage Do not pull out the tray with too much force Doing so may hit and injure your knees 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out We A f f Y 4 3 Push the tray
180. ecking status of parts and supplies 247 checking the status of parts and supplies 247 checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 271 checking virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 271 choosing a fax connection 125 cleaning exterior of the printer 239 scanner glass 240 cleaning the printhead lenses 241 Close cover x 299 Close door x 299 collating copies 110 confidential print jobs 102 printing from a Macintosh computer 103 printing from Windows 103 Confidential Print menu 177 configuration information wireless network 55 Configure MP menu 154 configuring e mail settings 116 configuring port settings 62 connecting printer to distinctive ring service 127 connecting the printer to regional adapters 127 conservation settings brightness adjusting 69 Eco Mode 67 Quiet Mode 67 Sleep Mode 68 69 conserving supplies 66 contacting customer support 345 control panel printer 23 copy quality adjusting 109 copy screen advanced options 115 options 113 114 115 140 Copy Settings menu 190 copy troubleshooting copier does not respond 317 partial document or photo copies 319 poor copy quality 317 poor scanned image quality 320 scanner unit does not close 317 copying adding a date and time stamp 112 adding an overlay message 112 adjusting quality 109 canceling a copy job 112 113 collating copies 110 Index 362 custom job job build 111 different paper sizes 108 enlarging 109 multiple pages on
181. ected Download shows all the fonts downloaded in RAM All shows all fonts available to any option Identifies a specific font and where it is stored Note RO Courier is the factory default setting The RO Courier format shows the font name font ID and storage location in the printer The font source abbreviation is R for Resident F for Flash K for Disk and D for Download Specifies the symbol set for each font name Notes e 10U PC 8 is the US factory default setting 12U PC 850 is the international factory default setting e Asymbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters punctuation and special symbols Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text Only the supported symbol sets are shown Changes the point size for scalable typographic fonts Notes e 12 is the factory default setting e Point Size refers to the height of the characters in the font One point equals approximately 1 72 of an inch e Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0 25 point increments Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts Notes 10 is the factory default setting Pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters per inch cpi Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0 01 cpi increments For non scalable monospaced fonts the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed Understanding printer menus 230 Menu item Description
182. ective fuser For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part Troubleshooting 341 Toner specks Try one or more of the following IMIAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE Replace the defective or worn cartridges MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective photoconductor unit CALL CUSTOMER SUPPORT Transparency print quality is poor Try one or more of the following CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog Solving color quality problems FAQ about color printing What is RGB color Red green and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature For example red and green can be combined to create yellow Televisions and computer monitors create colors in this manner RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red green or blue needed to produce a certain color What is CMYK color Cyan magenta yellow and black inks or toners can be printed in various am
183. ed cccccssccccsseccecceececceseceeeseseceeeeueceeeeneeeeeeeeeesneeeeeges 306 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will NOt be restored ce eccccsssccccessseeeeseceeeeneceeeueeeeeseaeeeesseeeeeees 306 28 MEWO lles ae veanewavnces yoda A a a E a ATEA 306 39 Complex page some data May not have printed ssesssssesseersseersssssrssseesssrerssreressresssrosssrersserererrreresss 306 40 color invalid refill change cartridge scisicsucvaswovedssnisledenwssvead evade iawedecaalvectenwcsceen vaieadeseveaswaddatineesteatiasievedletaveas 306 5 L DETECUIVE fash detected nenorima Aan A 306 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for FESOUMCES cccceseccesseccceseccesseecessseeceecseeecseeesseaseeessaeeeaees 306 58 Unformatted fas M dotectEd enerig ir eE E EEEE E a a 307 PANEtWOrk KI SOMEW ale OUI OP ae e E E E A EO 307 BAP SEL al O PHON 1X1 CUE Oan a a E O A 307 54 Standard network software error sssssssssseesssreesreresseessssessesressrrererrresssrosseessseressrrrresteessseesssesreresseessseess 307 SS UnNsUPpPOredoptionin SIOE IX erna A AEE A 307 5G Parallel DOre x CISA OC eari a a a need 308 Contents 11 DO SEM al POM X CISA CO resia eE T EA ENEE T ATENEA EN AAE sadceandveduatensemiien 308 56 Standard USB p rtaabled szenie i A 308 56 Standard Parallel port GiISAO CG eeu via svainazaviwes vues a N 308 EUSB DOM i ISA DIOG kreier a E E AEEA OEN E O a E ai 308 58 TOOUMANY GISKS installed serii nE A T a
184. ed fax Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 200 A Menu item Description Max Speed Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 Fax Forwarding Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient Print Print and Forward Forward Forward to Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded Fax Note This menu is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server E mail FTP LDSS eSF Forward to Shortcut Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type Fax E mail FTP LDSS or eSF Block No Name Fax Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified On Banned Fax List Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer Holding Faxes Enables fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule Held Fax Mode Note Off is the factory default setting off Always On Manual Scheduled Fax Holding Schedule Specifies whether prints are punched Staple Specifies whether prints are stapled Off 1 staple 2 staples 4 staples Enable Color Fax Receive Enables the device to receive fax in color Understanding printer menus 201 Fax Log Settings Menu item Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Receive Error Log Print Never Print on Error Auto Print Logs Log Paper Source Tray x Manual Feeder
185. edentials User Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials Use Session User ID amp Password Use Session E mail address amp Password Prompt User Device Userid Device Password Kerberos 5 Realm NTLM Domain Security menu Editing Security Setups menu Description Sets the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the SMTP server Notes e Disabled is the factory default setting e When the Negotiate setting is used the SMTP server determines if SSL will be used Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e mail privileges Note No authentication required is the factory default setting Specifies what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e mail Notes None is the factory default setting for Device and User Initiated E mail e Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected Description Edit Backup Password Creates a backup password Note This menu item will only appear if a backup password exists Edit Building Blocks Edits the Internal Accounts NTLM various Setups Password and PIN Edit Security Templates Adds or edits a Security Template Edit Access Controls Controls access to printer menus firmware updates held jobs and other access points Understanding printer menus 175 Miscellaneous
186. eeae amas a a a E RRE 90 Supported TINISMING FEATULCS eaa EAE S EAA EEOAE AE 92 Setting the finisher exit DIM seusia betes EE ETE O Ree a a 95 PRIM UNS TdOCUMEN rna DEE T E A E 96 PUntiNEe a dOCUMEN inr a aa A E vine eare eset 96 PHAUIN GAD DIAC ANG WNE sanie E A A Mau aivateasnenieeds 96 AGJUSTING toner GOlKIMCSS vsavaosncieseswaareieaten tesaaeenacnanaatchs sunaeraun anes waeaaaes a Oeasueatatneesenae ieee Nerete ole Ramone anon 96 Using Max Speed ANd Wax Yield cennera anaa a eksantdtrean tea a octanuieedies 97 PRIMUS TEOMA a TAS MON lV Cec vass ernst secadeacsactedcesaasncos exes vastaunncuads a E TEEN 98 Painting EDOM A TAS Mi GVIVS sinnena aaa a ass eeareaeuseders 98 Supported flashdrives and TG TY DOS yaiciss caine daeinvcwanudunstsdundba veaacnaupabbetnansaseraeh oedatonstunts ben tecdemusmeecbusansiaelaraiatedions 99 Panting OM specialty medida arrena ten seal Senedaeee odie dcaances cell aeic T a 100 TIPS OM USING letterhead iaun tenses noevseaveaaneasawacnaaey eases torent es vaese aeievaah omer saavaabarsaaansnnien 100 TAPS OPP USING transparencies aer a saveke wats EE E E E E E E NTA 100 Tips omusing GnVelODE Seynin a a a tasted aa ea a EER 101 Tips omM sine TapE rena AR TA A 101 WSOP USING Card StOCK arnie a A NA 102 Printing confidential and other held JODS oniinn a a a aa a r a 102 Storme print JOOS inthe PENTEL crina a e 102 Printing confidential and other held jobS eessnsssssnssssenssseerseerssserssssrssssrressrererrres
187. efault setting Specifies if the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a copy Note 3 is the factory default setting Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Creates a sample copy of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 194 Fax Settings menu Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line General Fax Settings Menu item Description Fax Name or Station Name Specifies the name of the fax in the printer Fax Number or Station Number Specifies the number assigned to the fax Station ID Specifies how the fax is identified Fax Name or Station Name Fax Number or Station Number Enable Manual Fax Sets the printer to fax manually only which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset On Notes e Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number Touch 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function Memory Use Defines the allocation of non volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs Equal Notes Mostly sent All send Equal is the factory default setting Equal splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs i
188. eing considered for use before buying large quantities e Feed transparencies from the standard tray or from the multipurpose feeder e From the Paper menu set the Paper Type to Transparency e Use transparencies designed specifically for laser LED printers Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures of 230 C 446 F without melting discoloring offsetting or releasing hazardous emissions e To prevent print quality problems avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies e Before loading transparencies flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together e We recommend Lexmark transparencies For ordering information see the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Printing 100 Tips on using envelopes Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities Use envelopes designed specifically for laser LED printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220 C 446 F without sealing wrinkling curling excessively or releasing hazardous emissions For best performance use envelopes made from 90 g m 24 Ib bond paper or 25 cotton All cotton envelopes must not exceed 70 g m 20 Ib bond weight Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages To optimize performance and minimize jams do not use envelopes that Have excessive curl or twist Are stuck together or damaged in any way Have windows holes pe
189. empts to bring the scanner back online 1565 Emulation error load emulation option The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware card Solving basic printer problems If there are basic printer problems or the printer is unresponsive make sure e The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker e The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords e Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working e The printer is turned on Check the printer power switch e The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer print server option or other network device e All options are properly installed e The printer driver settings are correct Once you have checked each of these possibilities turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on This often fixes the problem Solving printing problems Multiple language PDF files do not print The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts 1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat 2 Click the printer icon gt Advanced gt Print as image gt OK gt OK Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds The printer self test failed Turn the printer off wait about 10
190. enu select Local AppleTalk Zone Select the printer from the list and then click Add Note If the printer does not show up in the list then you may need to add it using the IP address For more information contact your system support person Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP is installed in the printer the printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address All computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address Notes e If the printer has a static IP address then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations e If the computers are configured to use network name that will stay the same instead of by IP address then you do not need to make any changes to your computer configurations e If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection then make sure the wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly If the wired connection remains connected then the wireless configuration will complete but the wireless ISP will not be active In the event that the printer was configured for a wireless ISP while still attached to a wired connection disconnect the wired connection turn the printer off and then turn the printer back on again This will enable the
191. er by selecting 2 sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting a setting from the Multipage printing N Up section of the Print dialog screen Check your first draft for accuracy Before printing or making multiple copies of a document e Use the preview feature which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the document will look like before you print it e Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy Avoid paper jams Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams For more information see Avoiding jams on page 273 Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 66 Print in black and white To print all text and graphics using only the black toner cartridge set the printer to Black Only For more information see Printing in black and white on page 96 Use Max Speed or Max Yield settings The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield Max Speed is the factory default setting For more information see Using Max Speed and Max Yield on page 97 Saving energy Using Eco Mode 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the print
192. er you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Eco Mode gt select a setting gt Submit Choose aK Use factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco Mode This setting supports the performance specifications of your printer Energy Reduce energy use especially when the printer is idle Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity When the printer enters Sleep mode the printer control panel display and the standard exit bin lights are turned off If scanning is supported the scanner lamps are activated only when a scan job is started Energy Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode Paper e Enable the automatic duplex feature e Turn off print log features Reducing printer noise To select a Quiet Mode setting using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings
193. er Bin Heavy Paper Bin Rough Cotton Bin Custom x Bin Reports menu Reports menu Description Menu Settings Page Prints a report containing information about the paper loaded into trays installed memory total page count alarms timeouts printer control panel language TCP IP address status of supplies status of the network connection and other information Device Statistics Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages Network Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Note This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers Network x Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Notes e This menu item is available when there is more than one network option installed e This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers Shortcut List Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts Understanding printer menus 161 Menu item Description Fax Job Log Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes Note This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu Fax Call Log Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attemp
194. er the printer requires intervention to continue processing Access the messages screen for more information on the message and how to clear it USB or USB Thumbdrive View select print scan or e mail photos and documents from a flash drive Note This button appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or flash drive is connected to the printer Bookmarks Create organize and save a set of bookmarks URL into a tree view of folders and file links Note The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function and not from any other application Held Jobs Display all current held jobs Understanding the home screen 24 Other buttons that may appear on the home screen Touch To Search held jobs Search on any of the following items e User name for held or confidential print jobs e Job names for held jobs excluding confidential print jobs e Profile names Bookmark container or print job names e USB container or print job names for supported file types Release Held Fax Access the list of held faxes Note This button appears only when there are held faxes with a scheduled hold time previously set Lock Device Open a password entry screen Enter the correct password to lock the printer control panel Note This button appears only when the printer is unlocked and password has been set Unlock Device Open a password entry screen Enter the correct password to unlock the p
195. erate at a lower power configuration If the printer is in Sleep Mode then the touch screen appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color Press and hold the Sleep button for 3 seconds or longer to enter Hibernate mode Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode Understanding printer menus 189 A Menu item Description Factory Defaults Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings Do Not Restore Notes Restore Now e Do Not Restore is the factory default setting Do Not Restore keeps the user defined settings e Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network Ports menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected Copy Settings menu Description Content Type Specifies the content of the original document Text Photo Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Graphics Photo Content Source Specifies how the original document was produced Color Laser Note Color Laser is the factory default setting Inkjet Magazine Press Black White Laser Photo Film Newspaper Other Specifies whether or not copies are printed in color Note On is the factory default setting Allow color copies Lets you enable or disable color in copying Notes e On is the factory default setting e Setting this to
196. erclockwise and then remove the jammed paper 9 Close door G 10 If necessary touch Continue from the printer control panel Clearing jams 292 Paper jam in cover F paper transport 1 Open cover F 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Note If the paper jam on the right is difficult to remove then rotate the knob counterclockwise 3 Close cover F 4 If necessary touch Continue from the printer control panel Clearing jams 293 455 staple jam 1 Open door G 2 Press the latch to open the stapler door Note The stapler door is located behind the finisher m Aa N _ 3 Lower the latch of the staple cartridge holder and then pull the staple cartridge holder out of the printer Clearing jams 294 4 Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard and then remove any jammed or loose staples 5 Close the staple guard 6 Press down on the staple guard until it clicks into place 7 Push the staple cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the staple cartridge holder clicks into place 8 Close the stapler door Clearing jams 295 9 Close door G 10 If necessary touch Continue jam cleared from the printer control panel 28y xx paper jams The scanner failed to feed one or more p
197. es photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Header Footer 4 Pick an area of the page where you want to place the date and time 5 Touch Yes or No gt gt Copy It Placing an overlay message on each page An overlay message can be placed on each page The message choices are Urgent Confidential Copy Custom or Draft To place a message on the copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Overlay gt select overlay message gt 7 4 Touch Copy It Canceling a copy job Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF When the ADF begins processing a document the scanning screen appears To cancel the copy job touch Cancel Job on the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass Touch Cancel Job on
198. es an invalid PIN can be entered Off 2 10 Notes e This menu appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Once the limit is reached the print job for that user name and that PIN are deleted Confidential Job Expiration Limits the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted Off 1 hour Notes e If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside on the printer RAM or printer hard disk then the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value 4 hours 24 hours 1 week If the printer is turned off then all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted Repeat Job Expiration Sets a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Verify Job Expiration Sets a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Reserve Job Expiration Sets a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Note Off is the factory default setting Disk Wiping menu Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Note This menu appears only when a formatted non defecti
199. escription Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Number of Copies 1 999 Header Footer Location Off Date Time Page number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Overlay Off Confidential Copy Draft Urgent Custom Custom Overlay Allow priority copies Custom Job scanning On Allow Save as Shortcut Background Removal 4to4 Specifies the exit bin to be used for the copy job Notes Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed Specifies the number of copies for the copy job Note 1 is the factory default setting Specifies header footer information and its location on the page For the location choose from the following options Top left Top middle Top right Bottom left Bottom middle Bottom right Notes e Off is the factory default setting for the location e All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Specifies the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Specifies the custom overlay text Note A maximum of 64 characters is allowed Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document Note On is the factory default setting Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a valid p
200. et this option using the Embedded Web Server type the network printer IP address or host name in a browser window Reduces the amount of toner used for graphics and images The amount of toner used for text is not reduced Notes e Off is the factory default setting On overrides Toner Darkness settings Adjusts brightness in color outputs Notes e Ois the factory default setting e This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are used Understanding printer menus 225 f Menu item RGB Contrast 0 5 RGB Saturation 0 5 Color Balance Cyan 5to5 Magenta 5to5 Yellow 5to5 Black 5to5 Reset Defaults Color Samples sRGB Display SRGB Vivid Display True Black Vivid Off RGB US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off CMYK Description Adjusts contrast in color outputs Notes e QO isthe factory default setting e This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are used Adjusts saturation in color outputs Notes e QO is the factory default setting e This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are used Adjusts color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner used for each color Note 0 is the factory default setting Prints sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the printer Notes e Selecting any setting prints the sample Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with
201. etting E mail amp Delete Oldest Log e The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is Post Current Log triggered Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current Disk Full Action Determines how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit None 100MB E mail amp Delete Current Log Note None is the factory default setting E mail amp Delete Oldest Log Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current URL to Post Logs Determines where the printer posts job accounting logs Understanding printer menus 221 A Menu item Description E mail Address to Send Logs Specifies the e mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs Log File Prefix Note The current host name defined in the TCP IP menu is used as the default log file prefix Finishing menu Menu item Description Sides Duplex Specifies whether duplex 2 sided printing is set as the default setting for all print 1 sided jobs 2 sided Notes e 1 sided is the factory default setting e You can set 2 sided printing from the software program For Windows users click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup For Macintosh users choose File gt Print and then adjust the settings from the pri
202. etween Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document Separator Source Specifies the paper source for separator sheets Tray x Notes Manual Feeder e Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting e From the Paper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette for Manual Feeder to appear as a menu setting Paper Saver Specifies that multiple page images be printed on one side of a paper Off 2 Up Notes 3 Up e Off is the factory default setting 4 Up e The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Paper Saver Ordering Specifies the positioning of multiple page images when using Paper Saver Horizontal Notes Reverse Horizontal Revae Vertical e Horizontal is the factory default setting Vertical e Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Paper Saver Orientation Specifies the orientation of a multiple page document Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and Landscape landscape Portrait Paper Saver Border Prints a border on each page image None Note None is the factory default setting Solid Understanding printer menus 223 A Menu item Staple Job Off Auto Back Dual Dual Double Front Hole Punch On Hole Punch Mod
203. evenstateashindsaneedesusaiewsedssundestedwatesiatsede dunes serdsere sausictantermiese 311 88 2 REPlace Color carrida vias osaea eis E actuate A 311 8S 001 COOK CARER CSO VOW auni ease sas cence taeele vacate tea eb ee vase aw dauist a a 312 88 xX Color cartridge very JOW cduisiecsavetacinnesnurataceinusnaistenetearsusnoldvevsnseventuvadensndddeaecee essed EREN AA ENEA aian 312 2yy xx Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job sssensssenesssesssserssrereserersssresssresserererereresse 312 2000C Pa CU IANS SMS ennen scares a a a a a a a a a 312 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin sssssessnesssseesssressrrereseerosssesssresserersrrrersseresssessseesssrrreserereseressssreresssessseesss 313 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists ccccceecccceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 313 1565 Emulation error load emulation option cccccssssssccesseeccaescccuescceeaesceesuancesseasceseeaeceeseaeeeeeeseeaggseeas 313 SOWING pasic PrN COOL ODIGINS oiran a a a a a a 313 SOIVING PInNtUNE DODIES ronssin a a TAE T a e eed 313 Multiple language PDE files do NOt PriNt acesora A E A e S 313 Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamondS ccceseesccceessceceesceceesceesaescessaaaeeeeeaeees 313 Error messaccaboutredadine USBR Arnyve appear erimi i onn raa raaa EEE E N 314 PRIME JOOS dO NOt anaia a a a a a a a a e A EA 314 Confidential and other held jobs do not prin
204. exmark International Inc at www lexmark com or your Lexmark representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved This equipment contains no user serviceable parts For repair and warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc See the previous paragraph for contact information Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your telephone company or a qualified installer Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use
205. exposed to high temperatures Storing paper unwrapped in hot humid cold or dry conditions even in the trays can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems Smoothness Paper smoothness directly affects print quality If paper is too rough toner cannot fuse to it properly If paper is too smooth it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points however smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality Moisture content The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period Grain direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper Grain is either grain long running the length of the paper or grain short running the width of the paper For 60 to 135 g m 16 to 36 Ib bond paper grain long paper is recommended For papers heavier than 135 g m grain short
206. f recycled paper produced specifically for use in laser electrophotographic printers While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well Lexmark consistently tests papers that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market This scientific testing is conducted with rigor and discipline Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole including the following e Amount of post consumer waste Lexmark tests up to 100 post consumer waste content e Temperature and humidity conditions Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world e Moisture content Business papers should have low moisture 4 5 e Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer e Thickness impacts how much can be loaded into a tray e Surface roughness measured in Sheffield units impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper e Surface friction determines how easily sheets can be separated e Grain and formation impacts curling which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves through the printer Brightness and texture look and feel Recycled papers are better than ever however the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control over foreign matter And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner they are not perfect The ener
207. f the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG e JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs e XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer Color This option enables or disables color for the scanned image Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Scanning 140 Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your files will turn out in relation to the original document Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding e Sides Duplex Specifies if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned e Orientation Specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the orientation e Binding Specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document
208. facturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information Regulatory notices for wireless products This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters for example but not limited to wireless network cards or proximity card readers Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies A minimum separation of 20 cm 8 inches must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies Industry Canada Canada This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided
209. for distinguishing between fax and voice calls If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack 3 Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer Note The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On This allows the printer to answer single double and triple ring patterns a From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Settings gt Distinctive Rings b Select the pattern setting you want to change and then touch Submit Connecting to an adapter for your country or region The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone wall jack Country Region e Austria e New Zealand e Cyprus e Netherlands e Denmark e Norway e Finland e Portugal e France e Sweden Germany e Switzerland e ireland e United Kingdom e Italy For some countries or regions a telephone line adapter is included in the box Use this adapter to connect an answering machine telephone or other telecommunications equipment to the printer 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2
210. g Lexmark products To return Lexmark products for recycling 1 Visit our Web site at www lexmark com recycle 2 Find the product type you want to recycle and then select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note Printer supplies and hardware not listed in a Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept Recycling Lexmark packaging Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions energy savings and natural resource savings Lexmark cartons are 100 recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area When you return a cartridge to Lexmark you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in Lexmark will recycle the box Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling One hu
211. g system 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF gt Forms and Favorites 3 Define the bookmarks and then customize the settings 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen and then navigate through form categories or search for forms based on a form number name or description Setting up Scan to Network Description The application lets you capture a digital image of a hard copy document and route it to a shared network folder You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations Notes e The printer must have permission to write to the destinations From the computer where the destination is specified use sharing security and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a write access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined Setting up and using the home screen applications 30 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separate
212. g the printer control panel e Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time e Scan documents and send them to your computer an e mail address a flash drive or an FTP destination e Scan documents and send them to another printer PDF by way of FTP Learning about the printer 21 Understanding the ADF and scanner glass Automatic Document Feeder ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents Using the ADF The ADF can scan multiple pages including two sided duplex pages When using the ADF Note Duplex scanning is available only in select printer models e Load the document into the ADF faceup short edge first e Load up to 110 sheets of plain paper into the ADF e Scan sizes from 125 x 85 mm 4 9 x 3 35 in wide to 297 x 432 mm 11 69 x 17 in long e Scan media weights from 38 to 128 g m 25 67 to 86 48 Ib e Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass Using the scanner glass The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages When using the scanner glass e Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner wit
213. genta Photoconductor Unit Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Yellow Photoconductor Unit Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Separator Roll and Pick Assembly OK Replace Waste Toner Bottle Near Full Replace Missing OK Staple Cartridge Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Description Shows the status of the black toner cartridge Shows the status of the cyan photoconductor unit Shows the status of the magenta photoconductor unit Shows the status of the yellow photoconductor unit Shows the status of the separator roll and pick assembly Shows the status of the waste toner bottle Shows the status of the staple cartridge Understanding printer menus 149 Menu item Description Hole Punch Box Shows the status of the hole punch box Near Full Replace Missing OK 160K Maintenance Kit Shows the status of the maintenance kit Near End of Life End of Life OK 320K Maintenance Kit Shows the status of the maintenance kit Near End of Life End of Life OK 480K Maintenance Kit Shows the status of the maintenance kit Near End of Life End of Life OK Paper menu Default Source menu Description Default Source Sets a default paper source for all print jobs Tray x MP Feeder Manual Paper Notes e Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting e From the Paper menu Configure MP feeder must be set to Cassette for MP feeder to appear as a menu Setting Manual Envelope e Ifthe
214. gh Cotton Recycled fardstoce yfyf fransparensis Lv fy ty fy Pee PE TEP frees Kee Finisher Use this table to determine the possible exit destinations of print jobs which use supported paper types and weights The paper capacity of each exit bin is listed in parentheses Paper capacity estimations are calculated based on 75 g m 20 Ib paper The finisher standard bin and Bin 1 support 60 220 g m7 16 60 Ib paper weights Bin 3 booklet maker supports 60 90 g m 16 24 lb paper weights plus one additional cover weighted up to 220 g m 60 Ib Paper type Standard Second exit bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 500 sheet bin a eomm yo y G G a a a a menor Paper and specialty media guidelines 91 ea Finisher standard bin 2 i Finisher bin 1 ES Finisher bin 2 booklet maker 4 Papertransport Paper and specialty media guidelines 92 Notes e The finisher shown is the booklet finisher Bin 2 is available only when the booklet finisher is installed e All paper tray capacities are based on 75 g m2 20 Ib paper Paper transport e The paper capacity is 50 sheets e Finishing options are not supported in this bin Envelopes are routed here e Universal paper is routed here when it is longer than 483 mm 19 in or shorter than 148 mm 6 in Finisher standard bin e The paper capacity is 500 sheets e Envelopes and executive size paper are not supported in this bin
215. ginal document Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Specifies how the original document was produced Note Color Laser is the factory default setting Specifies whether or not copies are printed in color Note On is the factory default setting Specifies the quality of the scan in dots per inch Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting Lightens or darkens the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Note Portrait is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 210 Menu item Description Original Size Specifies the paper size of the original document Letter Legal Executive Tabloid Folio Statement Universal 4x 6 in 3x 5in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A3 A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B4 JIS BS Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 Text Default 5 90 Text Photo Default 5 90 Notes e Letter is the US factory default setting e A4 is the international factory default setting Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edg
216. ginal document and then changes Sides and Binding to match the orientation e Binding Use to specify if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the fax When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Delayed Send This lets you send a fax at a later time or date 1 Set up your fax 2 From the home screen navigate to Delayed Send gt enter the date and time you want to send your fax gt Done Note If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent then the fax is sent the next time the printer is turned on This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours or when transmission times are cheaper Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings e Advanced Imaging Use to adjust the Background Removal Contrast Color Balance Negative Image Mirror Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you fax the document e Custom Job Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job e Edge Erase Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge
217. going faxes Note Standard is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 196 A Menu item Description Original Size Specifies the paper size of the original document Mixed Sizes Note Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory Letter default setting Legal Executive Tabloid Folio Statement Universal 4x6in 3x5in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A3 A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Sides Duplex Specifies how text and graphics are oriented on a page Off Long edge Notes Short edge e Off is the factory default setting e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Content Type Specifies the content of the original document Text Note Text is the factory default setting Graphics Text Photo Photo Content Source Specifies how the original document was produced Color Laser Note Color Laser is the factory default setting Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Black and White Laser Understanding printer menus 197 Menu item Description Darkness Lightens or darkens the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Dial Prefix Lets you enter a dialing prefix such as 99 Anumeric entry field is
218. gs gt E mail Settings 3 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information 4 Click Submit Creating an e mail shortcut Creating an e mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click Manage Shortcuts gt E mail Shortcut Setup 4 Type a unique name for the recipient and then enter the e mail address Note If you are entering multiple addresses then separate each address with a comma 5 Select the scan settings Format Content Color and Resolution 6 Enter a shortcut number and then click Add If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number Creating an e mail shortcut using the touch screen 1 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient gt type an e mail address To create a group of recipients touch Next address and then type the next recipient s e mail address 2 Touch 3 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then touch Done 4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then ree
219. gs gt General Settings gt Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button gt Hibernate 2 Touch Submit Adjusting the brightness of the display To save energy or if you have trouble reading your display then adjust the brightness of the display Available settings range from 20 100 The factory default setting is 100 Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings 3 In the Screen Brightness field enter the brightness percentage you want for the display 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings 2 Touch the arrows until Screen Brightness appears and then select a setting 3 Touch Submit Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 69 Recycling Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling For more information see e The Notices chapter e The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment e The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle Recyclin
220. gy required to de ink and deal with additives such as colorants and glue often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production However using recycled papers enables better resource management overall Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment the company commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor up to 80 of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device from design to end of life This is due to the energy intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper Thus Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper Using recycled paper is one way Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another Lexmark is well equipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste In addition the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers although a converter s product list for special applications is maintained However the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing 1 Minimize paper consumption 2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber Buy from suppliers who carr
221. h the green arrow e Scan or copy documents up to 297 x 432 mm 11 69 x 17 in e Copy books up to 12 7 mm 0 5 in thick Learning about the printer 22 Understanding the printer control panel 1 2 3 4 a ey Display Shows the status of the printer and allows printer setup and operation Indicator light e Off The printer is off e Blinking green The printer is warming up processing data or printing e Solid green The printer is on but idle e Blinking red The printer requires operator intervention is needed Enables Sleep Mode or Hibernate Mode The following are the statuses of the indicator light and the Sleep button e Entering or waking from Sleep Mode The indicator light is illuminated solid green Sleep button is unilluminated Operating in Sleep Mode The indicator light is illuminated solid green Sleep button is illuminated solid amber Entering or waking from Hibernate Mode The indicator light is illuminated solid green Sleep button is illuminated blinking amber Operating in Hibernate Mode The indicator light is unilluminated Sleep button is blinking amber for 1 10 of a second then go completely unilluminated for 1 9 seconds in pulsing pattern The following actions wake the printer from Sleep Mode e Touching the screen or any hard button presses e Opening an input tray cover or door e Sending a print job from the computer e Performing a Power On Reset POR with the main power switch
222. hades displayed as colored boxes that are similar to a user defined RGB or CMYK value The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment box Troubleshooting 344 To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer then you can e View the information on the printer control panel home screen or in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP IP section 2 Click Configuration gt Color Samples gt Detailed Options 3 Select a color conversion table 4 Enter the RGB or CMYK color number 5 Enter an increment value from 1 255 Note The closer the value is to 1 the narrower the color sample range will appear 6 Click Print Embedded Web Server does not open Try one or more of the following CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network CHECK THE ADDRESS ENTERED IN THE WEB BROWSER e Depending onthe network settings you may need to type https instead of http before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server For more information contact your system support person e Make sure printer IP address is correct
223. hance Fine Lines On Color Saver On RGB Brightness 6 to 6 Adjusts the color output on the printed page Notes e Auto is the factory default setting Auto applies different color conversion tables to each object on the printed page e Manual allows customization of color tables using the settings available from the Manual Color menu e Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors certain colors that appear on computer screens are impossible to duplicate on a printed page Specifies the printed output resolution Notes e 2400 Image Q is the factory default setting e 1200 dpi provides the highest resolution output and increases gloss Lightens or darkens the printed output Notes e 4 is the factory default setting e Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner e f Print Mode is set to Black Only then a setting of 5 increases toner density and darkness for all print jobs e If Print Mode is set to Color then a setting of 5 is the same as a setting of 4 Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings maps electrical circuit diagrams and flow charts Notes e Off is the factory default setting e You can set this option from the software program For Windows users click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup For Macintosh users choose File gt Print and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and pop up menus e To s
224. hased Warranty information varies by country or region e Inthe US See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer or at http support lexmark com e In other countries and regions See the printed warranty that came with your printer Selecting a location for the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely When selecting a location for the printer leave enough room to open trays covers and doors If you plan to install any options then leave enough room for them also It is important to Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet e Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee 156 standard e Provide a flat sturdy and stable surface Keep the printer Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners heaters or ventilators Free from direct sunlight humidity extremes or temperature fluctuations Clean dry and free of dust Away from stray staples and paper clips e Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation Learning about the printer 18 es ea ae Ge eee ee ee ee Right side 307 34 mm 12 1 in Ca Front 4aa smm 07 5 in 3 lefeside 374 65 mm 14 75 in Cs top 3088 mm 12m
225. he IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts 3 Inthe Sleep Mode field enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to E gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts 2 Touch the arrows next to Sleep Mode to select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode 3 Touch Submit Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 68 Using Hibernate Mode Hibernate is an ultra low power operating mode When operating in Hibernate mode the printer is essentially off and all other systems and devices are powered down safely Note The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Sleep Button Settings 3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop down select Hibernate 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settin
226. he factory default setting Set Hostname Lets you set the current TCP IP hostname Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server IP Address Lets you view or change the current TCP IP address Note Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP Lets you view or change the current TCP IP netmask Lets you view or change the current TCP IP gateway Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting Note On is the factory default setting Specifies the RARP address assignment setting Note On is the factory default setting Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting Note On is the factory default setting Enable AutolP Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Understanding printer menus 165 A Menu item Enable FTP TFTP Yes No Enable HTTP Server Yes No WINS Server Address Enable DDNS Yes No Enable mDNS Yes No DNS Server Address Enable HTTPS Yes No IPv6 menu Description Enables the built in FTP server which allows you to send files to the printer using File Transfer Protocol Note Yes is the factory default setting Enables the built in web server Embedded Web Server When enabled the printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a web browser Note Yes
227. he following LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER e Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked e Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray Use THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS e Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray e f necessary adjust the settings from the Paper Size Type menu Note The standard 550 sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size You must set the size from the Paper Size Type menu Large jobs do not collate These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON From the Finishing menu or Print Properties set Collate to On Note Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the job Troubleshooting 316 MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY Add printer memory or an optional hard disk Unexpected page breaks occur INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts 2 Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value appears 3 Touch Submit Solving copy problems Copier does no
228. he paper type being manually loaded Plain Paper Note Plain Paper is the factory default setting Card Stock Transparency Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type x Manual Envelope Size Specifies the envelope size being manually loaded 10 Envelope Notes DL Envelope e 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting DL Envelope is the international factory default setting Printing a custom size envelope is not supported C5 Envelope Other Envelope 7 3 4 Envelope eee Other Envelope printing is not supported Manual Envelope Type Specifies the envelope type being manually loaded Envelope Note Envelope is the factory default setting Rough Envelope Custom Type x Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Understanding printer menus 153 Configure MP menu Configure MP Cassette Manual First Substitute Size menu Menu item Substitute Size All Listed Off Statement A5 Letter A4 11 x 17 A3 Paper Texture menu Plain Texture Normal Rough Smooth Card Stock Texture Normal Rough Smooth Transparency Texture Normal Rough Smooth Recycled Texture Normal Rough Smooth Description Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder Notes e Cassette is the factory default setting Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source e Manu
229. he power cord from the wall outlet 3 Install the specified tray Troubleshooting 300 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Cancel the print job Load src with custom type name Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it prints from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load src with custom string Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder e Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it prints from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load src with size Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it feeds from the default paper so
230. he printer before proceeding 2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin 3 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water Warning Potential Damage Do not use household cleaners or detergents as they may damage the finish of the printer 4 Wipe only the exterior of the printer making sure to include the standard exit bin Warning Potential Damage Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer 5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job MAKE SURE THE PAPER FEED ROLLERS ARE CLEAN AND ARE NOT CONTAMINATED WITH DUST 1 Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 2 Remove the paper feed rollers Note For instructions on how to remove and reinstall the paper feed rollers see the setup sheet that came with the rollers inside the compartment box of Tray 1 3 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water Troubleshooting 337 4 Clean the paper feed rollers Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the rubber Doing so will damage the rollers 5 Reinstall the paper feed rollers Note Make sure to replace the worn or defective paper feed rollers Solid color pages MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS NOT DEFECTIVE AND IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY Remove and then reinstall the photoconductor If the problem continues then the photoconductor may need to be replaced Black or white streaks appear on transparen
231. he printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Administrative support 271 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click E mail Alert Setup 4 Select the items for notification and type the e mail addresses 5 Click Submit Note For information on setting up the e mail server contact your system support person Viewing reports You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer the network and supplies To view reports from a network printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Reports and then click the type of report you want to view Restoring factory default settings If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages an
232. her than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations Modular component notice This product may contain the following modular component s Lexmark regulatory type model LEX M01 003 FCC ID IYLM01003 IC 2376A M01003 Lexmark regulatory type model LEX M05 001 FCC ID IYLLEXM05001 IC 2376A M05001 Lexmark regulatory type model LEX M05 002 FCC ID IYLLEXM05002 IC 2376A M05002 Licensing notices All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the CD LEGAL directory of the installation software CD Noise emission levels The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296 Note Some modes may not apply to your product Notices 348 1 meter average sound pressure dBA Printing 53 dBA Ready 35 dBA Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE directive g The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling p
233. hernet cable when installing the printer on a wireless network Prepare to configure the printer 1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn the printer on 2 Locate the printer MAC address a From the home screen navigate to i5 gt Reports gt Network Setup Page b Inthe Standard Network Card section look for UAA MAC Note You will need this information later Enter the printer information 1 Access the AirPort options In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Network gt AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Internet Connect gt AirPort 2 From the Network Name pop up menu select print server yyyyyy where the y s are the last six digits of the MAC address located on the MAC address sheet 3 Open a Web browser 4 From the Bookmarks menu select Show or Show All Bookmarks 5 Under COLLECTIONS select Bonjour or Rendezvous and then double click the printer name Note The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10 2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc 6 From the Embedded Web Server navigate to where the wireless settings information are stored Additional printer setup 58 Configure the printer for wireless access Type the network name SSID in the appropriate field Select Infrastructure as your Netwo
234. i E TE r a 44 REMOVING c DEIN bee Nra Csi arsar EE E 48 Installing hardware OPtiONS cccccccccsseccsecccssecceecceeseecencceeececsseceeeeeeeseeceeeessucesenecseecesueesaeeeseeeaeeeeneeeaeess 49 rder orias aaO ene E E E A E E aeerneins 49 Contents 2 HAS CANIS CO OUON AI EROY S Serene E EA ATA EESE 50 Attaching cable ae me Po eR ee ee 52 Vorne OTIS CUD tetera votre sc see oe ctoats etna eta a stents es asses Date EE ET 53 Printinge a menu settings Palaui vides cass re ote es ear ease co ons enters tention da teen E A ieee es 53 Printinge a network setup DAC C si vecscsiowsauletinvetead suai an AEAEE weeds acrid dedantalvade uate E ESEE Aea 54 SENE UP the DINEE SOT W al O na eedaaie ene mae 54 installing the pinter SoftWare sas iacersccissscinincatiaceaeeciaca E T A 54 Updating available options in the printer driver ssssssessssserssssrsssssesssrererrresserosssosssrrressrerereresseressoseereesseessee 54 SECTS UD WwWreleSS ONNE oriri raii ann a TE a A AG 55 Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network sssssssssessseerseerssserosssesssreesssrereserene 55 Installing the printer on a wireless network WindOWsS ssssssnsssssnnssssseereesserresserrresesrereesererreeeerereesessssreesse 56 Installing the printer on a wireless network MacintoSh sesssnessssnsssssseressserreossrrreosssrrreeereereeerrrreeessssseresss 58 Installing theprinter ona Wired NEUW OF Koniiana a a E ee 60 Changing po
235. ina tray or multipurpose feeder Copies This option allows you to set the number of copies to be printed Scale This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25 and 400 Scale can also be set for you automatically e When you want to copy from one size of paper to another such as from legal size to letter size paper setting the Copy from and Copy to paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information on your copy Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1 touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1 e Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change e Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate Copying 113 Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document Sides Duplex Use this option to select duplex settings You can print copies on one or two sides make two sided copies duplex of two sided original documents make two sided copies from one sided original documents or make one sided copies simplex from two sided original documents Collate This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document The factory default setting for Collate is on the output pages of your copies will be ordered 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 If you want a
236. incoming color formats RGB Graphics sRGB Display Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs Display True Black Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on acomputer monitor Uses only black toner to create all levels of neutral gray sRGB Vivid Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB Display color correction Black usage is optimized for printing business graphics Off No color correction is implemented CMYK Image US CMYK Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP CMYK Text Specifications for Web Offset Publishing color output CMYK Graphics Euro CMYK Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color output Vivid CMYK Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color correction setting Off No color correction is implemented How can I match a particular color such as a corporate logo From the printer Quality menu nine types of Color Samples sets are available These are also available from the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server Selecting any sample set generates a multiple page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box depending on the table selected The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion tab
237. ing e Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape JPEG Quality Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality Best for content 5 90 Notes e Best for content is the factory default setting e 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened e 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large e This menu applies to all scan functions Text Default Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image 5 90 Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default Sets the quality of a text photo image in relation to file size and quality 5 90 Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality 5 90 Note 50 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 215 Menu item Description Use Multi Page TIFF Scan Bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Custom Job Scanning On Scan Preview On Background Removal 4 to 4 Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Best for content 0 5 Mirror
238. ing any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 36 2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk To unplug the cable squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out Additional printer setup 48 3 Remove the screws while holding the printer hard disk in place and then remove the printer hard disk 4 Set aside the printer hard disk Installing hardware options Order of installation CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer A CAUT
239. ing printer menus 151 A Menu item MP Feeder Size Letter Legal Executive JIS B4 A3 11x17 Oficio M xico Folio Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope Other Envelope A4 A5 A6 MP Feeder Type Custom Type x Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Description Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes e Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting e From the Paper menu Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for MP Feeder to appear as a menu e Other Envelope printing is not supported Specifies the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes Custom Type x is the factory default setting e From the Paper menu Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu setting Understanding printer menus 152 f Menu item Description Manual Paper Size Specifies the paper size being manually loaded Letter Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory Legal default setting Executive JIS B4 A3 11x17 Oficio M xico Folio Statement Universal A4 A5 A6 Manual Paper Type Specifies t
240. ing the printer 265 3 Hold the tabs on both sides of the staple cartridge o h a E d W UT Hn f Wa J ea YX A Maintaining the printer 266 4 Rotate the booklet staple cartridge at an angle al wW d ft ff M E AN Maintaining the printer 267 5 Lift the booklet staple cartridge out of the unit M L wW d Tr l P AALALA Maintaining the printer 268 8 Return the cartridge to its original position and then gently push the cartridge in until it clicks into place I n 10 Close door G Maintaining the printer 269 Moving the printer Before moving the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage e Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet e Disconnect all cords and cable
241. ings Only Single or Triple Rings Only Double or Triple Rings Only Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission Fax Server Setup Description To Format Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch screen Reply Address Message SMTP Setup Specifies SMTP setup information Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server port information Secondary SMTP Gateway Image Format Specifies the image type for scan to fax PDF pdf XPS xps TIFF tif Content Type Specifies the content of the original document Text Note Text is the factory default setting Text Photo Graphics Photo Understanding printer menus 203 Menu item Content Source Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Fax Resolution Standard Fine 200 dpi Super Fine 300 dpi Ultra Fine 600 dpi Darkness 1 9 Orientation Portrait Landscape Original Size Letter Legal Executive Tabloid Folio Statement Universal 4x 6 in 3x 5in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A3 A4 A5 Oficio Mexico JIS B4 JIS BS Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Description Specifies how the original document was produced Note Color Laser is the factory default setting Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax Lightens or darkens the output Note 5 factory default setting Specifies the orientation of the sc
242. ions where to find 17 Q Quality menu 224 Quiet Mode print quality troubleshooting 330 R recycled paper using 66 86 recycling Lexmark packaging 70 Lexmark products 70 toner cartridges 70 WEEE statement 349 reducing acopy 109 reducing printer noise 67 Remote Operator Panel setting up 32 Remove paper from linked set bin name 303 Remove paper from all bins 303 Remove paper from bin x 303 Index 368 Remove paper from standard output bin 303 removing printer hard disk 48 repeat print jobs 102 printing from a Macintosh computer 103 printing from Windows 103 replacing maintenance kit 249 replacing a staple cartridge 262 replacing a toner cartridge 255 replacing supplies staple cartridge 262 toner cartridge 255 waste toner bottle 257 replacing the waste toner bottle 257 reports viewing 272 Reports menu 161 reserve print jobs 102 printing from a Macintosh computer 103 printing from Windows 103 resolution fax changing 132 Restore held jobs 303 restoring factory default settings 272 S safety information 15 16 saving paper 111 Scan Center features 143 Scan Document Too Long 304 scan screen advanced options 145 options 144 scan to computer options 144 145 Original size 144 paper orientation setting 145 Scan to Network setting up 30 scan troubleshooting cannot scan from a computer 321 partial document or photo scans 321 scan was not successful 320 scanner unit does not close 317 sca
243. is recommended Paper and specialty media guidelines 84 Fiber content Most high quality xerographic paper is made from 100 chemically treated pulped wood This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling Unacceptable paper The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer e Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless papers carbonless copy paper CCP or no carbon required NCR paper e Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer e Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser e Preprinted papers that require a registration the precise print location on the page greater than 2 3 mm 0 9 in such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms e Coated papers erasable bond synthetic papers thermal papers e Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers e Recycled papers that fail EN12281 2002 European Paper weighing less than 60 g m 16 Ib e Multiple part forms or documents Selecting paper Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble free printing To help avoid jams and poor print
244. is the factory default setting Lets you view or change the current WINS server address Lets you view or change the current DDNS setting Note Yes is the factory default setting Lets you view or change the current mDNS setting Note Yes is the factory default setting Lets you view or change the current DNS server address Lets you view or change the current HTTPS setting Note Yes is the factory default setting This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt IPv6 Note This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers Menu item Enable IPv6 Auto Configuration On Off Set Hostname View Address View Router Address Enable DHCPv6 Description Enables IPv6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router Note On is the factory default setting Lets you set the hostname Note These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Enables DHCPv6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 166 Wireless menu Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings Note This menu is available only in printer models connected to a wireles
245. itch PS SmartSwitch NPA Mode Auto Off Network Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Job Buffering Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes On is the factory default setting e When Off is used the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes On is the factory default setting e When Off is used the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Sets the size of the network input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting The value can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amo
246. item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Sets the netmask information for an external print server Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Sets the gateway information for an external print server Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Understanding printer menus 169 Parallel x menu Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch PS SmartSwitch Parallel Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Disabled Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified i
247. k Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing e Format the printer hard disk If the error message remains the hard disk may be defective and require replacing Troubleshooting 309 80 xx Fuser life warning e Order a replacement fuser immediately When print quality is reduced install the new fuser following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 80 Replace fuser 1 Replace the fuser using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 80 Scanner maintenance required use ADF kit Contact customer support and report the message The printer is scheduled for maintenance 80 Scheduled maintenance x Contact customer support and report the message The printer is scheduled for maintenance 80 Replace paper pick rollers in paper source use parts and instructions in tray 1 compartment Try one or more of the following Touch Continue and replace later to ignore the message and continue printing Note Worn or defective paper pick rollers may cause paper jams Replace the worn or defective paper pick rollers and then touch Rollers replaced to clear the message and continue printing 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle 1 Replace the waste toner bottle For instructions on replacing the waste toner bottle
248. know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Scan Profile gt Create 3 Select your scan settings and then click Next 4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file Scanning 142 5 Enter a scan name The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display 6 Click Submit 7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents a Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass b If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides c Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad or touch Held Jobs on the home screen and then touch Profiles d After entering the shortcut number the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program you specified If you touched Profiles on the home screen then locate your shortcut on the list 8 Return to the
249. l tone then connect the printer to that wall jack Troubleshooting 322 REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST The fax modem is an analog device Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used e If you are using an ISDN telephone service then connect the printer to an analog telephone port an R interface port on an ISDN terminal adapter For more information and to request an R interface port contact your ISDN provider e If you are using DSL then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use For more information contact your DSL provider e If you are using a PBX telephone service then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX If none exists consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE e Place atest call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly e If the telephone line is being used by another device then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax e If you are using the On Hook Dial feature then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT To ensure the printer is working correctly connect it directly to the telephone line Disconnect any answering machines computers with modems or telephone line splitters CHECK FOR JAMS Clear any jams and then make sure that Ready
250. lash are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Notices 360 Index Numerics 1565 Emulation error load emulation option 313 1 tray module installing 50 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder installing 50 2000 sheet high capacity feeder loading 77 201 202 paper jams 275 203 paper jam 276 230 paper jam 278 231 paper jam 278 24x paper jam 280 250 paper jam 286 280 06 Paper missing 312 281 paper jam 287 28y xx paper jams 296 2yy xx Close flatbed cover and load Originals if restarting job 312 31 xx Missing or Defective color cartridge 304 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by device 304 34 Incorrect paper size check paper source 304 34 Incorrect paper type check paper source 305 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 305 36 Printer service required 305 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment Operation 305 37 Insufficient memory to collate job 305 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 306 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 306 38 Memory full 306 39 Complex page some data may not have printed 306 3 tray module installing 50 40 color invalid refill change cartridge 306 455 staple jam 294 4yy xx paper jams 289 51 Defective flash detected 306 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 306 520 sheet tray standard or optional loading 72 53 Unformatted flash detected 307 54 Network x software error 307 54 Serial o
251. last successfully scanned page Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the scan job at the last successfully scanned page Note This does not cancel the scan job All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying faxing and e mailing 280 06 Paper missing Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Touch Cancel job to cancel the job and clear the message Touch Scan from automatic feeder to resume the scan job from the ADF immediately following the last successfully scanned page Touch Scan from flatbed to resume the scan job from the scanner glass immediately following the last successfully scanned page Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the scan job at the last successfully scanned page Note This does not cancel the scan job All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying faxing or e mailing Touch Restart job to clear the message and start a new scan job with the same settings as the previous job Troubleshooting 312 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin Print without the scanner or contact your system support person 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists Try one or more of the following Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen and then contact your system support person e Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job Note This att
252. le By examining Color Samples sets a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color The color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program For more information see the software program Help topics Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the selected color conversion table for the particular object Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color matching problem depends on the Color Correction setting being used Auto Off or Manual the type of object being printed text graphics or images and how the color of the object is specified in the software program RGB or CMYK combinations When the printer Color Correction setting is set to Off the color is based on the print job information and no color conversion is implemented Note The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations Additionally certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management The resulting printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer A detailed Color Samples set contains a range of s
253. lick or click Start and then click Run b Inthe Start Search or Run box type D setup exe where Dis the letter of the CD or DVD drive c Press Enter or click OK Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen Note To configure the printer using a static IP address IPv6 or scripts select Advanced Options gt Administrator Tools 3 Select Ethernet connection and then click Continue Attach the appropriate cable to the computer and to the printer when instructed to do so Select the printer from the list and then click Continue Note If the configured printer does not appear on the list then click Modify Search Follow the instructions on the computer screen Additional printer setup 60 For Macintosh users 1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer 2 Obtain the printer IP address You can a View the information on the printer control panel home screen or in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu b Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP IP section Note You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer 3 Install the printer drivers and then add the printer a Install a printer driver file on the computer 1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD and then double click the installer package for the printer Follow the instructions on the c
254. lick Security gt Set Date and Time 3 Inthe Set Date amp Time field enter the current date and time 4 Click Submit Note It is recommended to use the network time Faxing 128 Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Security gt Set Date and Time 3 Select the Automatically Observe DST checkbox and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time Zone Setup section 4 Click Submit Creating shortcuts Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send a fax you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number A shortcut can be created to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Prin
255. ll the copies of each page to remain together turn Collate off and your copies will be ordered 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 Content This option lets you set the original document type and source Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations e Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos e Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer e Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer e Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film e Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine e Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper e Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press e Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Color This option enables or disables color for the scanned image Copying 114 A
256. llowing M AKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY 1 Open the paper tray 2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds 3 Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper 4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on IMIAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray then it may not be properly installed Reinstall the paper tray For more information see the hardware setup documentation that came with the paper tray or go to http support lexmark com to view the paper tray instruction sheet 2 000 sheet drawer problems CHECK THE DRAWER CONNECTION Make sure the 2 000 sheet drawer is properly connected to the printer LOAD PAPER If the tray is empty then load paper in the tray or feeder CLEAR ANY JAMS Open the side door of the tray or feeder and then remove any jammed paper AVOID PAPER JAMS e Flex the paper e Make sure the drawer is properly installed e Make sure paper is loaded correctly e Make sure the paper stack you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray e Make sure the paper or specialty media meets specifications and is not damaged e Make sure the guides are positioned correctly for the paper size loaded Memory card Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the pri
257. lose the front door 13 Turn the printer back on Maintaining the printer 261 Replacing a staple cartridge Note A message on the printer display indicates which staple cartridge needs to be replaced Replacing staple cartridge in the standard stapler unit 1 Open door G 3 Pull the staple cartridge out of the finisher Note Use just a slight force when removing the staple cartridge Maintaining the printer 262 Po e ea AN J 4 Squeeze both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers and then remove the staple case from the cartridge at e Q N ei AJ 5 Insert the front side of the new staple case into the staple cartridge and then push the rear side into the cartridge 2 me fi W Maintaining the printer 263 6 Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place 7 Close door G Replacing staple cartridge in the booklet stapler unit Note This task is applicable only when a booklet finisher is installed 1 Open door G Maintaining the printer 264 2 Press the handles of the staple cartridge to the right and then take the staple cartridge unit out of the finisher SS D gt Maintain
258. lt setting Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area Note On is the factory default setting When On is selected bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area Specifies whether image background removal is allowed in copy fax e mail FTP or scan to USB jobs Note On is the factory default setting The background of the image will be removed Lets you scan multiple jobs to one file Note On is the factory default setting If On is selected the Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs Understanding printer menus 186 Menu item Scanner Jam Recovery Job level Page level Web Page Refresh Rate 30 300 Contact Name Location Alarms Alarm Control Cartridge Alarm Staple Alarm Hole Punch Alarm Timeouts Standby Mode Disabled 1 240 Description Specifies how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF Notes Job level is the factory default setting e If Job level is selected then the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam e If Page level is selected then rescan from the jammed page forward Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes Note 120 seconds is the factory default setting Specifies a contact name for the printer Note The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Specifies the location of the printer Note The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Sets a
259. m x Loading Off Duplex Notes Description Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Letterhead as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Preprinted as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Colored as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Light as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Heavy as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Rough or Cotton as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Custom x as the paper type Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Custom x Loading is available only if the custom paper type is supported e Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print Properties e f Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided print jobs Understanding printer menus 157 Custom Types me
260. magazine e Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper e Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press e Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Resolution This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax If you are faxing a photo a drawing with fine lines or a document with very small text then increase the Resolution setting This will increase the amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output Standard Suitable for most documents e Fine 200 dpi Recommended for documents with small print e Super fine 300 dpi Recommended for original documents with fine detail e Ultra fine 600 dpi Recommended for documents with pictures or photos Note Fine 200 dpi and Super fine 300 dpi is displayed when color printing is selected Faxing 134 Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document Color This option enables or disables color in faxing Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding settings e Sides Duplex Use to specify if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax e Orientation Use to specify the orientation of the ori
261. me may negatively affect actual yield for that color and may cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner Recommended toner cartridges and part numbers Black high yield toner cartridge X950X2KG Yellow high yield toner cartridge X950X2YG Maintaining the printer 247 Part name Part number Magenta high yield toner cartridge X950X2MG Cyan high yield toner cartridge X950X2CG Ordering a photoconductor unit When 84 xx Color photoconductor lowor84 xx Color photoconductor nearly low appears order a replacement photoconductor unit When 84 xx Replace color photoconductor appears replace the specified photoconductor Recommended photoconductor units and part numbers Part name Part number Photoconductor unit C950X71G Black e Cyan e Magenta Yellow CMY Cyan Magenta Yellow Photoconductor Kit C950X73G Note CMY photoconductor units may reach end of life all at the same time Ordering a waste toner bottle When 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full appears order a replacement waste toner bottle When 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle appears replace the waste toner bottle Note Waste toner bottle reuse is not recommended Part name Part number Waste toner bottle C950X76G Ordering staple cartridges When Staples Lowor Staples Empty appears order the specified staple cartridge For more information see the illustrations inside the stapler door Part name Part number St
262. ment faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options 4 From the Darkness area touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax 5 Touch Fax It Sending a fax at a scheduled time 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options gt Advanced Options gt Delayed Send Note If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server the Delayed Send button will not appear Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the Fax Queue Faxing 132 4 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes If the current time is shown the left arrow is unavailable 5 Touch Fax It Note The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time Viewi
263. menu check the Paper Size setting 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the paper size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the paper size from the Page Setup dialog Close cover x Close the specified cover to clear the message Close door x Close the specified door Disk corrupted The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk and the hard disk cannot be repaired The hard disk must be reformatted Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message Note Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk Empty the hole punch box 1 Empty the hole punch box For instructions on emptying the hole punch box from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Reinsert the hole punch box into the finisher and then touch Continue to clear the message Error reading USB drive Remove USB An unsupported USB device has been inserted Remove the USB device and then install a supported one Error reading USB hub Remove hub An unsupported USB hub has been inserted Remove the USB hub and then install a supported one Fax memory full There is not enough memory to send the fax job Touch Continue to clear the message Troubleshooting 299 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator The fax partition appears to be corrupted Try one or more of the follo
264. n follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter Note Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration 3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use Notes e Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region Depending on the ISDN port assignment you may have to connect to a specific port e When using a PBX system make sure the call waiting tone is off e When using a PBX system dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number e For more information on using the fax with a PBX system see the documentation that came with your PBX system Faxing 126 Connecting to a distinctive ring service A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider This service allows you to have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line with each telephone number having a different ring pattern This may be useful
265. n alarm to sound when the printer requires operator intervention Available selections for each alarm type are Off Single Continuous Notes e Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control Single sounds three quick beeps Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm Off means no alarm will sound Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer enters a lower power state Note 15 minutes is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 187 Menu item Description Timeouts Sleep Mode 2 240 Timeouts Screen Timeout 15 300 Timeouts Print Timeout Disabled 1 255 Timeouts Wait Timeout Disabled 15 65535 Timeouts Job Hold Timeout 5 255 Print Recovery Disabled Auto Continue 5 255 Sets the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it goes into a reduced power state Notes 30 minutes is the factory default setting Lower settings conserve more energy but may require longer warm up times Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the room Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use Under most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm up time Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before returning the printer display to a Ready state
266. n name such as a company domain name and then limits e mail Limit destinations destinations to that domain name only Notes e E mail can be sent only to the specified domain e The limit is one domain Understanding printer menus 205 Menu item E mail Server Setup Web Link Setup Server Login Password Path Base file name Web Link Format PDF pdf Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version 1 2 1 6 A la Content Type Text Photo Photo Text Graphics Content Source Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Black and White Laser Resolution 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi 75 dpi Darkness 1 9 Description Defines the e mail server path name for example directory path Note The characters lt gt areinvalid entries for a path name Specifies the format of the scanned file Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e mailing Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Specifies the content of the original document Note Text Photo is the factory default setting Specifies how the original document was produced Note Color Laser is the factory default setting Specifies whether or not copies are printed in color Note On is the factory default setting Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting
267. n the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Sets the size of the parallel input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any print jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer disable or reduce the size of the USB serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding printer menus 170 Menu item Description Job Buffering Advanced Status Protocol Fastbytes Standard Honor Init On Parallel Mode 2 Mac Binary PS Auto ENA Address YYY YYY YYY YYY ENA Netmask YYY YYY YYY YYY Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing No
268. n the printer off and then back on This often fixes the problem with the scanner Scan was not successful These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM Turn off and then restart the computer Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING Close all programs not being used THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH Select a lower scan resolution Poor scanned image quality These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 240 ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory Troubleshooting 320 CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Partial document or photo scans These are possible solutions Try one or more of the foll
269. n touch one of the following e Wipe disk fast This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass e Wipe disk secure This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times followed by a verification pass A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220 22 M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task Note Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 5 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Securing the hard disk and other installed memory 237 Configuring printer hard disk encryption Note Your printer may not have a hard disk installed Enabling hard disk encryption helps prevent the loss of sensitive data in the event your printer or its hard disk is stolen Using the Embedded Web Server 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings gt Security gt Disk Encryption Note Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed 2 From the Disk encryption menu select Enable Notes e Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk e Disk encryption can take fr
270. nchons are NOUSEL UD anonn N EA 321 Caler IDIS NOSOWE a aa A a udvieesees 322 Cinnot send Or receve d TiK ouna a a a a a E T 322 Can send But NOE FECEIVE TIKES oaan i E E A ira aus ates tae eae 324 Cin FeCeIVe DUE TOE SEINE TAXES aiden esau tea asa uesaesh A a datadinAdaph aoe sid aa rOeeaeeceat 324 Received Tax aS DOOM LIM EQUI IE tance vas etecoasvuneosucwalee Re N N 325 Solving home screen applications DFODIEINS ixaiikisices oa Aascctsd nieetdtcsies Meta eee 325 ANVAD PIE ALON error Mas OCCU eiee a A E N A 325 SOMVIPS ODEON POD CIS druira a A a 326 Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed eee cesssecesseceenececeeceseecesseseeeenseceeseeeeuss 326 PAD Gr tray pProODIEMS eani RA A A A 327 2 000 sheetdrawer problems rnersanra a EN A N NNN 327 MEMO E O a A E T pou enladantsoads 327 Cannotiderect Tash memory card aia ea N 328 Cnpotdetec printer Nard dis Kesesi a a a a aia aa muerte 328 Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly cccccccssssccccsssecceeseecseeseceseeaccesauacesaeseesesaucesseaeesaagseees 328 Internal print server does NOt Operate correctly niana E AA 328 USB parallel interface card does not Operate correctly cccccccccccccccceeeesssseseesseecccccceceeeeeeeusesegeceeeeeceeeeeeeas 328 SOIVINE Paper 1ECO PFODI EMIS ecra eia ae a a eE ra e TENE 329 Paper treguentiy jan nornerne e E AA A E T AAT 329 Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared cccseeececcesseecceeeecceeesec
271. nd of photoconductor unit AUN Gs Pee N i J AX wes i Maintaining the printer 251 7 Remove the tape from the top of the photoconductor unit Maintaining the printer 252 9 Push the photoconductor unit until it clicks into place Maintaining the printer 253 11 Close the cover 12 Rotate the release lever clockwise to lock the cover Maintaining the printer 254 13 Close the front door Replacing a toner cartridge 1 Open the front door Maintaining the printer 255 3 Pull out the toner cartridge 4 Unpack the replacement toner cartridge and then shake it front to back and side to side to evenly distribute the toner 5 Remove the red packing strip from the new cartridge 6 Insert the new cartridge into the printer Maintaining the printer 256 7 Close the front door Replacing the waste toner bottle 1 Turn the printer off 2 Open the front door 3 Remove the used waste toner bottle Maintaining the printer 257 4 Unpack the new waste toner bottle we 5 Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer until it clicks into place Maintaining the printer 258 7 Lower the cover 8 Slide out the printhead wipers Maintaining the printer 259 9 Slide the printhead wipers back into place 10 Close the cover Maintaining the printer 260 11 Rotate the release lever clockwise to lock the cover 12 C
272. ndred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label You can also do the following 1 Visit our Web site at www lexmark com recycle 2 From the Toner Cartridges section select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 70 Loading paper and specialty media Setting the paper size and type The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the multipurpose feeder The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size menu The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a tray gt select the paper size or type gt Submit Configuring Universal paper settings The Universal Paper Size is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus Set paper size to Universal for the specified tray when the size you want is not available from the Paper Size menu Then specify all of the following Universal size se
273. nductor 1 Replace the photoconductor following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 From the printer control panel touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 88 2x Replace color cartridge The specified toner cartridge is empty 1 Replace the specified toner cartridge 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 311 88 xx color cartridge low 1 2 3 4 Order a replacement toner cartridge immediately Remove the specified cartridge Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner Reinsert the cartridge and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Note Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded and then replace the cartridge 88 xx Color cartridge very low The specified print cartridge is very low 1 2 For instructions on replacing a print cartridge from the printer control panel touch More Information Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 2yy xx Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job Try one or more of the following Touch Cancel job to cancel the job and clear the message Touch Scan from automatic feeder to resume the scan job from the ADF immediately following the last successfully scanned page Touch Scan from flatbed to resume the scan job from the scanner glass immediately following the
274. ness 96 advanced options touch screen copy 115 e mail 122 fax 135 FTP 142 scanning to computer 145 AppleTalk menu 167 assigning a custom paper type name 83 attaching cables 52 available internal options 35 avoiding paper jams 273 B Bin 2 is unable to lower 297 Bin Setup menu 160 black and white printing 96 blank pages 336 blocking junk faxes 133 Booklet Adjustments menu 234 buttons printer control panel 23 buttons touch screen using 26 C cables Ethernet 52 USB 52 calling customer support 345 canceling print job from computer 104 canceling a print job from a computer 104 from the printer control panel 104 canceling an e mail 120 cannot open Embedded Web Server 345 card stock loading in multipurpose feeder 79 tips 102 Change paper source to custom string 297 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 298 Change paper source to custom type name 297 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 297 Change paper source to paper size 298 Change paper source to paper size paper type 298 Change paper source to paper size paper type load orientation 298 Change paper source to paper size load orientation 298 Check src orientation or guides 299 checking an unresponsive printer 313 checking an unresponsive scanner 319 checking printer status on Embedded Web Server 271 checking printer status using the Embedded Web Server 271 ch
275. ng e For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four print cartridges or whichever color has the shadow images 1 Remove the print cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the print cartridge Note If print quality does not improve replace the print cartridge of the color that is giving a shadow If the problem continues the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact customer support Gray background Troubleshooting 331 CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting e From the printer control panel Quality menu change the setting e For Windows users change the setting from Print Properties e For Macintosh users change the setting from the Print dialog THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the toner cartridge Incorrect margins x ABC DEF These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the pape
276. ng a fax log 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Reports gt Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log Blocking junk faxes 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup gt Block No Name Fax Notes e This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name In the Banned Fax List field enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to block Canceling an outgoing fax Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning e When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears e When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Faxing 133 Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned
277. ng fax or station NAME and number ccccceecccessscceeseccsececseccceecceseecetsesetsseeeeesecenseeegeees 128 Setting the dateand LINC cns n A ccluastaus den udde vad consbte nel a a aaa sobaldoubade a edwin 128 Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving tiMe cccccecccccsececeececeesceesecseneceeecesseceseueeeseuneseeeeeaess 129 Creatine SOG CLUS useaan a e T E A TA alacsaieeaeniusaes 129 Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server ccccsseccssecceeeceeecececseneceenecceneceeness 129 Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen ccceccessecceeeececeseeeceeeseeceeeecseaasessaeeeesseaeegees 129 Contents 6 SOIC NS he ooec asus oatcad austere a a a a T a 130 SENGING a rax usine TNE touch screen srna a a 130 SENGING a TACUSING the COMO ULE roria ra ara E NEA AE REET 130 SENGING a Tax Usine SNOUT S sanre AE AA A 131 SENGING a faxcUSING headdress DOOK ratre a A N 131 CUSTOMIZING TIX SEINES caeiiia teceenwutetacalesaashwiieisaeocisandahosasas E 132 Changing the taxresolutio Narna a a a a 132 Making a fax lighter or darker sss ssssesssssessserssseersssrssssrrsssrersreresserossessssrrresrreroreresserosseresseereessseesssreeeseeresseens 132 sendinga taxat a scheduled time rerni a E A A A A 132 VEW a Led NOR enaa a a a a A 133 BIOCKINE JURK FAXE Smisen e E E T EE TE 133 Canceling anr OUTSOINS Takarina a 133 Canceling a fax while the original documents are Still SC
278. nner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings You can use the printer to e mail scanned documents to one or more recipients There are three ways to send an e mail from the printer You can type the e mail address use a shortcut number or use the address book Getting ready to e mail Setting up the e mail function 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Default Settings click E mail FTP Settings 4 Click E mail Settings gt Setup E mail Server 5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information 6 Click Submit Configuring e mail settings 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section E mailing 116 2 Click Settings gt E mail FTP Settin
279. nning takes too long or freezes the computer 320 ScanBack Utility using 144 scanner Automatic Document Feeder ADF 22 functions 21 scanner glass 22 Scanner ADF Cover Open 304 scanner glass cleaning 240 scanner glass flatbed copying using 106 scanning from a flash drive 143 quick copy 105 to a computer 142 to an FTP address 139 to an FTP using address book 139 scanning to a computer 142 scanning to a flash drive 143 scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the computer 138 using shortcut numbers 139 using the address book 139 using the touch screen 139 Security Audit Log menu 179 selecting a location for the printer 18 sending a fax 130 sending a fax using shortcuts 131 sending a fax using the touch screen 130 sending fax using shortcuts 131 using the address book 131 sending fax at a scheduled time 132 sending fax using the address book 131 Serial x menu 172 serial printing setting up 64 Set Date Time menu 179 setting TCP IP address 165 setting the exit bin finisher 95 setting the fax number or station number 128 setting the outgoing fax name or Station name 128 setting the paper size 71 setting the paper type 71 setting the Universal paper size 71 setting up e mail alerts using the Embedded Web Server 271 setting up fax and e mail functions 321 setting up serial printing 64 setting up the printer on a wired network Macintosh 60 on a wired network Windows 60 Settings menu 219 shadow
280. nsMTCS NewSansMTCT New SansMTJA NewSansMTKO Note The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not specify a font Understanding printer menus 232 Menu item Description Font Size Sets the default font size for HTML documents 1 255 pt Notes e 12 pt is the factory default setting e Font size can be increased in 1 point increments Scale Scales the default font for HTML documents 1 400 Notes e 100 is the factory default setting Scaling can be increased in 1 increments Orientation Sets the page orientation for HTML documents Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Margin Size Sets the page margin for HTML documents 8 255 mm Notes e 19 mm is the factory default setting e Margin size can be increased in 1 mm increments Backgrounds Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents Print Note Print is the factory default setting Do Not Print Image menu Menu item Description Auto Fit Selects the optimal paper size scaling and orientation On Note On is the factory default setting It overrides scaling and orientation settings Off for some images Invert Inverts bi tonal monochrome images Off On Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images Scaling Scales the image to fit the selected paper size Best Fit Anchor Center Fit Height Width e Best Fit is the factory default setting N
281. nt 313 paper curl 333 paper frequently jams 329 print job takes longer than expected 315 tray linking does not work 316 unexpected page breaks occur 317 printer basic model 19 fully configured 19 minimum clearances 18 moving 18 270 selecting a location 18 shipping 270 turning on 34 printer configurations 19 printer control panel 23 adjusting brightness 69 factory defaults restoring 272 printer hard disk disposing of 236 encrypting 238 installing 44 removing 48 troubleshooting 328 wiping 237 printer hard disk encryption 238 printer hard disk memory erasing 237 printer information where to find 17 printer messages 1565 Emulation error load emulation option 313 280 06 Paper missing 312 2yy xx Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job 312 31 xx Missing or Defective color cartridge 304 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by device 304 34 Incorrect paper size check paper source 304 34 Incorrect paper type check paper source 305 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 305 36 Printer service required 305 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 305 37 Insufficient memory to collate job 305 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 306 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 306 38 Memory full 306 39 Complex page some data may not have printed 306 40 color invalid refill change cartridge 306 51 Defective flash
282. nt dialog and pop up menus Duplex Binding Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the Long Edge page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page Short Edge Notes e Long Edge is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Specifies the default number of copies for each print job Note 1 is the factory default setting Blank Pages Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print Collate Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Notes Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 e On is the factory default setting e On stacks the print job in sequence Understanding printer menus 222 Menu item Description Separator Sheets Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted Off Between Copies Notes Between Jobe e Off is the factory default setting Between Pages e Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs B
283. nter system board Troubleshooting 327 Cannot detect flash memory card Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board Cannot detect printer hard disk Make sure the printer hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly Try one or more of the following CHECK THE INTERNAL SOLUTIONS Port ISP CONNECTIONS Make sure the ISP is securely connected to the printer system board CHECK THE CABLE Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected to the Internal Solutions ISP port MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY For information on installing the network printing software see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD Internal print server does not operate correctly Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS e Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board e Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY For more information on installing the network printing software do the following 1 Open the Software and Documentation CD 2 Click Additional 3 Under Publications on this CD select Networking Guide USB parallel interface card does not operate correctly Check THE USB PARALLEL INTERFACE CARD CONNEC
284. nter the information E mailing 117 E mailing a document Sending an e mail using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Note Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same Failure to set the proper size may result to a cropped image 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient 4 Enter the e mail address or press and then enter the shortcut number To enter additional recipients touch Next Address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add Note You can also enter an e mail address using the address book 5 Touch Done gt Send It Sending an e mail using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press enter the shortcut number using the keypad and then touch To enter additional recipients
285. nto equal amounts All receive Mostly receive Mostly sent specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs All send specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs All receive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs Mostly receive specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs Cancel Faxes Specifies whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs Allow Don t Allow Caller ID Specifies the type of caller ID being used Alternate Fax number masking Specifies the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number Off Note The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to mask From left setting From right Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number 0 58 Understanding printer menus 195 Menu item Fax Cover Page Fax Cover Page Off by default On by default Never use Always use Include to field On Include from field On From Include Message field On Message Include Logo On Include Footer x Footer x Fax Send Settings Menu item Resolution Standard Fine 200 dpi Super Fine 300 dpi Ultra Fine 600 dpi Description Configures the fax cover page Note Off by default is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options Description Specifies quality in dots per inch dpi A higher resolution gives greater print quality but increases the fax transmission time for out
286. nto the non printable area defined by the Normal setting but the printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary Whole Page only affects pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter This setting has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter Sets color toner use in printing Notes e Max Speed is the default printer setting e The printer driver is capable of overriding this setting Sets the printer to print text and graphics using only the black print cartridge Note Off is the factory default setting Sets the storage location for downloads Notes e RAM is the factory default setting Storing downloads in RAM is temporary e Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off e This menu appears only when a flash and or disk option is installed Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads such as fonts and macros stored in RAM when the printer receives a job that requires more memory than is available Notes e Off is the factory default setting Off sets the printer to retain the downloads only until memory is needed Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs e On retains the downloads during language changes and printer resets If the printer runs out of memory then 38 Memory Full appears and downloads are not deleted
287. nu Custom Type x Paper Card Stock Letterhead Transparency Glossy Rough Cotton Labels Bond Envelope Recycled Paper Card Stock Letterhead Transparency Glossy Rough Cotton Labels Bond Envelope Custom Names menu Menu item Custom Name x none Description Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom Type x name or a user defined custom name created from the Embedded Web Server or from MarkVision Professional Notes e Paper is the factory default setting e The custom paper type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus Notes e Paper is the factory default setting e The custom paper type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Definition Specify a custom name for a paper type This name replaces the Custom Type x name inthe printer menus Understanding printer menus 158 Custom Scan Sizes menu Custom Scan Size x Scan Size Name Width 1 11 69 inches 25 297 mm Height 1 17 inches 25 432 mm Orientation Portrait Landscape 2 scans per side On Universal Setup menu Units of Measure Inches Millimeters Portrait Width 3 48 inches 76 1219 mm Portrait Height 3 48 inches 76 1219 mm Description Specifies a custom scan size name
288. oad the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup Notes e Place print side facedown for duplex printing e Place pre punched paper with the holes toward the front of the tray e Place letterheads faceup with the header on the left side of the tray e Place letterheads facedown with the header on the right side of the tray for duplex printing e Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray Warning Potential Damage Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage 5 Insert the tray 6 From the printer control panel verify the Paper Size and Paper Type setting for the tray based on the paper you loaded Loading paper and specialty media 76 Loading the 2000 sheet high capacity feeder The high capacity feeder can hold up to 2 000 sheets of letter A4 and legal size paper 80 g m or 20 lb 1 Pull the tray out 2 Adjust the width guide as necessary Loading paper and specialty media 77 3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface FIM y T a Note Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage Loading paper and specialty media 78 Notes e Place pre punched paper with the holes towa
289. obs that specify Card Stock as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Recycled as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Glossy as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Heavy Glossy as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Labels as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Vinyl Labels as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Bond as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting e Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print Properties e If Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided print jobs Understanding printer menus 156 Menu item Letterhead Loading Off Duplex Preprinted Loading Off Duplex Colored Loading Off Duplex Light Loading Off Duplex Heavy Loading Off Duplex Rough Cotton Loading Off Duplex Custo
290. of held jobs and deleting some of them Print job takes longer than expected Try one or more of the following REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Eliminate the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the print job TURN OFF THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery gt Page Protect gt Off gt 4 CHANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS When using Eco Mode or Quiet Mode settings you may notice a reduction in performance Troubleshooting 315 Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the paper type and paper size settings 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting e For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog Incorrect characters print e Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode If Ready Hex appears on the display you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode e Make sure the SmartSwitch settings are set to On in the Network and USB menus Tray linking does not work These are possible solutions Try one or more of t
291. ollowing screens appear Fax Name or Station Name Fax Number or Station Number 1 When Fax Name or Station Name appears enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 2 After entering the Fax Name or Station Name touch Submit 3 When Fax Number or Station Number appears enter the printer fax number 4 After entering the Fax Number or Station Number touch Submit Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Faxing 124 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 Inthe Fax Name or Station Name field enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 4 Inthe Fax Number or Station Number field enter the printer fax number 5 Click Submit Choosing a fax connection Notes e The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the telephone wall outlet Other devices such as a telephone or answering machine can be successfully attached to pass through the printer as described in the setup steps e If you want a digital connection such as ISDN DSL or ADSL then a third party device such as a DSL filter is required Contact your DSL provider for
292. om several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 3 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down and i while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears Once the printer is fully powered up the touch screen displays a list of functions instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or Fax 3 Touch Disk Encryption gt Enable Note Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task After the disk has been encrypted the printer will return to the Enable Disable screen Notes Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process Doing so may result in loss of data e Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 5 Touch Back and then Exit Config Menu The printer will power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Securing the hard disk and other installed memory 238 Maintaining the printer Periodically certain tasks are required to maintain optimum performance of your printer Cleaning the exterior of the printer 1 Make sure that the printer is
293. omputer screen Select a destination and then click Continue From the Easy Install screen click Install uk WwW N Type the user password and then click OK All the necessary applications are installed in the computer 6 Click Close when installation is complete b Add the printer e For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax 2 Click and then click the IP tab 3 Type the printer IP address in the address field and then click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities 2 Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 3 From the Printer List click Add and then click IP Printer 4 Type in the printer IP address in the address field and then click Add e For AppleTalk printing Note Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer In Mac OS X version 10 5 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax 2 Click and then navigate to AppleTalk gt select the printer from the list gt Add Additional printer setup 61 In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier 1 O UAWN 7 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center From the Printer List click Add Click Default Browser tab gt More Printers From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk From the second pop up m
294. on The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected toa telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact your local telephone company For products approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQ HTXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point for example 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is shown separately on the label If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If you experience trouble with this equipment for repair or warranty information contact L
295. on see Accessing the system board on page 36 Notes e This task requires a flathead screwdriver e Do not unplug the fan cable upon opening the metal panel 2 Unpack the card Note Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card Additional printer setup 39 3 Holding the card by its sides align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board 2 a Plastic pins Ez Metal pins 4 Push the card firmly into place Notes e The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board Be careful not to damage the connectors Additional printer setup 40 Installing an Internal Solutions Port The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board For more information se
296. on a wireless network Note Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software e SSID The SSID is also referred to as the network name e Wireless Mode or Network Mode The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc e Channel for ad hoc networks The channel defaults to auto for infrastructure networks Some ad hoc networks will also require the auto setting Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select Additional printer setup 55 e Security Method There are three basic options for Security Method WEP key If your network uses more than one WEP key enter up to four in the provided spaces Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the Default WEP Transmit Key or WPA or WPA2 passphrase WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security The choices are AES or TKIP Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network No security If your wireless network does not use any type of security then you will not have any security information Note Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended If you are installing the printer on an 802 1X network using the Advanced method then you may need the following e Authentication type Inner authentication type e 802 1X username and password e Certificates Note
297. on log or transmission error log Scanning 146 Understanding printer menus Menus list Supplies Replace Supply Cyan Cartridge Magenta Cartridge Yellow Cartridge Black Cartridge Cyan Photoconductor Unit Magenta Photoconductor Unit Yellow Photoconductor Unit Black Photoconductor Unit Separator Roll and Pick Assembly Waste Toner Bottle Staple Cartridge Hole Punch Box 160K Maintenance Kit 320K Maintenance Kit 480K Maintenance Kit Security Edit Security Setups Miscellaneous Security Settings Confidential Print Disk Wiping Security Audit Log Set Date and Time Option Card Menu Paper Menu Default Source Paper Size Type Configure MP Substitute Size Paper Texture Paper Loading Custom Types Custom Names Custom Scan Sizes Custom Bin Names Universal Setup Bin Setup Network Ports Active NIC Network Standard USB Parallel x Serial x SMTP Setup A list of installed DLEs Download Emulators appears Reports Menu Settings Page Device Statistics Network Setup Page Network x Setup Page Shortcut List Fax Job Log Fax Call Log Copy Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Profiles List Print Fonts Print Directory Asset Report Help Print All Guides Copy Guide E mail Guide Fax Guide FTP Guide Print Defects Guide Information Guide Supplies Guide 1 Depending on the printer setup this menu appears as Standard Network or Network x Thi
298. on to file size and quality of the image 5 90 Note 75 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 207 Menu item Description Text Photo Default 5 90 Photo Default 5 90 E mail images sent as Attachment Web Link Use Multi Page TIFF Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Log Paper Source Tray x Manual Feeder E mail Bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Custom Job scanning Background Removal 4 to 4 Sets the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 50 is the factory default setting Specifies how the images will be sent Note Attachment is the factory default setting Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to e mail job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes e On is the factory default setting e This menu applies to all scan functions Specifies whether or not the transmission log prints Note Print log is the factory default setting Specifies the paper source for printing e mail logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Enables the Text Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when
299. on you plan to set up later and then touch Continue The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Warning Potential Damage Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax Faxing 123 o Initial fax setup Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin atthe top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission station name identification of the business other entity or individual sending the message and station number telephone number of the sending fax machine business other entity or individual To enter your fax setup information use the printer control panel or use your browser to access the Embedded Web Server and then enter the Settings menu Note If you do not have a TCP IP environment then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information Using the printer control panel for fax setup When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time a series of start up screens appear If the printer has fax capabilities then the f
300. onductor unit do not leave the cover open for more than 10 minutes Maintaining the printer 241 4 Locate the printhead wipers Maintaining the printer 242 5 Gently pull the printhead wipers out until it stops and then slowly slide them back into place 6 Close the cover Maintaining the printer 243 7 Slide the release lever to the right to lock the cover 8 Close the front door Maintaining the printer 244 Emptying the hole punch box 1 Open door G a ENE _ _ _ _7 y K LC hah 7 fk 2 Pullout the hole punch box Maintaining the printer 245 3 Empty the container 4 Insert the emptied hole punch box back into the finisher until it stops 5 Close door G Storing supplies Choose a cool clean storage area for the printer supplies Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them Do not expose supplies to e Direct sunlight e Temperatures above 35 C 95 F e High humidity above 80 e Salty air Maintaining the printer 246 e Corrosive gases e Heavy dust Checking the status of parts and supplies A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required Checking the
301. one gt E mail It Changing the output file type 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient gt type an e mail address gt Send as 4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send e PDF Use this to create a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com e Secure PDF Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access e TIFF Use this to create multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG E mailing 119 e JPEG Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs e XPS Use this to create a single XML Paper Specification XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer 5 T
302. ons require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Safety information 16 Learning about the printer Finding information about the printer What are you looking for Find it here Initial setup instructions Setup documentation The setup documentation came Connecting the printer with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Installing the printer software Additional setup and instructions for using the printer User s Guide The User s Guide is available on the Selecting and storing paper and specialty media Software and Documentation CD For updates check our Web site at Loading paper http support lexmark com Configuring printer settings Viewing and printing documents and photos Setting up and using the printer software Configuring the printer on a network depending on your printer model Caring for and maintaining the printer Troubleshooting and solving problems Instructions for Networking Guide Open the Software and Documentation CD and then look for Printer and Software Documentation under the
303. ontains transparencies or touch Manual Feeder Size Load transparencies in the multipurpose feeder From the home screen navigate to amp gt select the desired size of the transparencies gt Manual Feeder Type gt gt Copy It Copying on letterhead 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt size of the original document gt Copy to gt Manual Feeder Copying 106 4 Place the letterhead faceup top edge first in the multipurpose feeder 5 Select the size of the letterhead 6 Navigate to Continue gt Letterhead gt Continue gt Copy It Customizing copy settings Copying to a different size 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Copy from gt select the size of the original document gt 5 Touch
304. os small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt change the copy settings gt Copy It Copying 105 Copying using the scanner glass 1 2 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner From the home screen navigate to Copy gt change the copy settings gt Copy It If you have more pages to scan then place the next document on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Next Page Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen Copying film photos 1 Place a photo facedown on the upper left corner of the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Content gt Photo gt 4 gt Photo Film gt gt Copy It gt Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job Copying on specialty media Copying on transparencies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt size of the original document gt 74 Touch Copy to and then select the tray that c
305. ote Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print Print Settings Setup menu Menu item Description Printer Language Sets the default printer language PS Emulation PCL Emulation Notes e PS Emulation is the factory default printer language e Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language Job Waiting Specifies that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they require unavailable printer options or custom settings They are On stored ina separate print queue so other jobs print normally When the missing information and or options are obtained the stored jobs print Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a non read only printer hard disk is installed This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power Understanding printer menus 219 Menu item Description Print Area Normal Whole Page Printer Usage Max Speed Max Yield Black Only Mode On Download Target RAM Flash Disk Resource Save On Print All Order Alphabetical Oldest First Newest First Sets the logical and physical printable area Notes e Normal is the factory default setting When attempting to print data in the non printable area defined by the Normal setting the printer clips the image at the boundary Whole Page allows the image to be moved i
306. otes Fit Height e When Auto Fit is set to On Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit Fit Width Anchor Top Left Understanding printer menus 233 Menu item Description Orientation Sets the image orientation Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Rev Portrait Rev Landscape Booklet Adjustments menu The Booklet Adjustments menu is available only when a booklet finisher is installed You can select various adjustments from this menu when printing booklets To access the Booklet Adjustments menu 1 2 Turn the printer off Hold down and while turning the printer on Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration Menu appears Touch the arrows until Booklet Adjustments appears 5 Touch Booklet Adjustments Menu item Description Size of paper Specifies the paper size JIS B4 Note This setting defaults to the Tray 1 paper size value Letter A4 Legal 11x17 A3 Oficio Folio Total number of sheets Specifies the total number of sheets in a booklet 1 2 sheets Note The factory default setting is 1 2 sheets 3 sheets 4 sheets 5 7 sheets 8 15 sheets Adjust for folding overlap Select top or bottom overlap based on prints Top overlap Bottom overlap Adjust for skew during booklet making Select skew direction based on prints Clockwise skew Counter clockwise skew
307. otos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Content 4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying e Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art e Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations e Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos e Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image 5 Touch 6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer e Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film e Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine e Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Copying 109 e Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an altern
308. ou specify the content type and source of the original document Scanning 144 Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art e Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos e Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film e Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine e Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper e Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation
309. ouch E mail It Note If you selected Secure PDF you will be prompted to enter your password twice Canceling an e mail e When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears e When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Understanding e mail options Recipients This option lets you enter the destination of your e mail You may enter multiple e mail addresses Subject This option lets you enter a subject line for your e mail Message This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment File Name This option lets you customize the attachment file name Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e mail e Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The e mail screen appears with the new setting displayed e When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes e When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document E mailing 120 Resolution Adjusts the output quality of your e mail Increasing the image resolution increases the e mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e mail file size Color
310. ounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature For example cyan and yellow can be combined to create green Printing presses inkjet printers and color laser printers create colors in this manner CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of cyan magenta yellow and black needed to reproduce a particular color Troubleshooting 342 How is color specified in a document to be printed Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations Additionally they allow users to modify the color of each object ina document For more information see the software program Help topics How does the printer know what color to print When a user prints a document information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer The color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of cyan magenta yellow and black toner needed to produce the desired color The object information determines the application of color conversion tables For example it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images Why doesn t the printed color match the color see on the computer screen The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard computer monitor However because
311. over page with fax and enter the appropriate information 7 Click OK Faxing 130 Notes e The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver For information on installing these drivers see the Software and Documentation CD e The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under Configuration tab before it can be used e if the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected then you will be prompted to verify the recipient information before the fax is sent If this check box is not selected then the queued document will be sent automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab Sending a fax using shortcuts Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine A shortcut number 1 99999 can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not place postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad 4 Touch Fax It Sending a fax using the address book The address book enables you to search for bookmarks and network directory servers Note If the a
312. owing CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting e For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Cannot scan from a computer These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer Solving fax problems Fax and e mail functions are not set up The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax and e mail To set up fax and e mail follow these steps Note Before completing these instructions for a printer on a network make sure the fax cables are connected 1 From the home screen navigate to gt General Settings gt Run initial setup gt Yes gt Submit 2 Turn the printer off and then turn it back on Troubleshooting 321 3 From the printer control panel touch your language 4 Touch your country or region
313. plications veces cs sescesesnewinatsesdacxtsasawsatboriseseabeanesaraeganeetaee a iaee 30 Sening UD FORMING and Favores rerosrecia nna EEEE E A E EEE 30 Setting UP Scan to NETWORK scosnevareninrinveieeinianedansntovsnensabdannaaggunsteseasnubivbinuueedndeaerensVasdeobioensiaenlanverssswaslinteplarnwniehas 30 SS UNIN MIEP eerren E E T E E A atesaeae 31 Under EAN CUI WV 5 SC a A E EN 31 Setting up Remote Operator Pane l ccccccccccsssscccccsseccesseeeccseeeeeesseceessseceesueeceeceaeeecseeeeeseaeeecsaaeeseecessueeceseueees 32 Exporting and importing a CONFIQZULATION cccccecccssccceeecsceseceeeecsceesecceeeeceneeeuesseeeeeuetsuceceeeeeeeeceagess 32 Additional printer setuUp ssssescescscossccosescosseoossosscosesosssceosesoesseosesessoeses DG TUNNE ONAE DENE aE T AE E E EE E E EA EE 34 ACNE Er OPO aae E E E A EE E E 35 Avala Ole Marn OE OMS orrira a E E E 35 Accessing the system 190 ANG teens scares snnsoniedssvasioiwareninunierernndtansacaaxisannsbeaascis mehivbanenaveusivedwaniatrbiacetsateabenwieuadesah 36 PASTAS amemo Car anni E E A meu enanesa Ns 37 Installing a flash memory or firmware card sssssssssssersreresserssssesssrsrsssrrrerrressrresssoessssesssrererrressreerereeeressseesses 39 Installing an Internal Solutions POIt ccceescecssssecceseseecceeseecceessccausescessuescesaeaeessauaeceseeaeeeesaesaeseesseaeesssageesseaes 41 installing a printer hard OSI rasa pot aguatexevenronenes avousnairenmuestio
314. printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then processes it appropriately When set to On the printer performs NPA processing If the data is not in NPA format it is rejected as bad data When set to Off the printer does not perform NPA processing Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding printer menus 172 Menu item Description Serial Buffer Sets the size of the serial input buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Disabled Auto is the factory default setting Notes Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
315. provided Dialing Prefix Rules Establishes a dialing prefix rule Prefix Rule x Automatic Redial Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number 0 9 Note 5 is the factory default setting Redial Frequency Specifies the number of minutes between redials 1 200 Behind a PABX Enables or disables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone No Yes Enable ECM Enables or disables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs Yes Enable Fax Scans Lets you fax files that are scanned at the printer Driver to fax Allows the printer driver to send fax jobs Yes Allow Save as Shortcut Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer Dial Mode Specifies the dialing sound either as a tone or a pulse Tone Pulse Max Speed Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 Custom Job scanning Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file On Scan Preview Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs On Understanding printer menus 198 Menu item Description Background Removal 4 to 4 Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Best for content 0 5 Mirror Image On Negative Image On Shadow Detail
316. ption x error 307 54 Standard network software error 307 55 Unsupported option in slot x 307 56 Parallel port x disabled 308 56 Serial port x disabled 308 56 Standard parallel port disabled 308 56 Standard USB port disabled 308 56 USB port x disabled 308 58 Too many disks installed 308 58 Too many flash options installed 309 58 Too many trays attached 309 59 Incompatible tray x 309 61 Remove defective disk 309 62 Disk full 309 63 Unformatted disk 309 80 Replace fuser 310 80 Replace paper pick rollers in paper source 310 80 Scanner maintenance required 310 80 Scheduled maintenance x 310 80 xx Fuser life warning 310 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle 310 82 xx Waste toner bottle missing 310 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full 311 83 xx Transfer module missing 311 84 unsupported color photoconductor 311 84 xx color photoconductor low 311 84 xx color photoconductor missing 311 Index 361 84 xx color photoconductor nearly low 311 84 xx Replace color photoconductor 311 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin 313 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 313 88 2x Replace color cartridge 311 88 xx color cartridge low 312 A accessing the Embedded Web Server 29 accessing the system board 36 Active NIC menu 162 adding a date and time stamp 112 ADF copying using 105 Adjusting color 297 adjusting copy quality 109 adjusting Sleep Mode 68 adjusting toner dark
317. r Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file is selected in the destination configuration settings ADJUST THE SCAN SETTINGS In the destination configuration settings lower the scan settings For example lower the scan resolution disable Color or change the Content type to Text CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT If you still cannot isolate the problem then contact customer support Solving option problems Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed Try one or more of the following RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER 1 Turn the printer off using the power switch 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and then from the printer 3 Check the connection between the option and the printer MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list If the option is not listed then reinstall it For more information see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option or go to www lexmark com to view the option instruction sheet MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED From the computer you are printing from select the option For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 54 Troubleshooting 326 Paper tray problems Try one or more of the fo
318. r all printers Francais Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Portuguese Suomi Russian Polski Magyar Turkce Cesky Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean Japanese Eco Mode Minimizes the use of energy paper or specialty media Off Energy Notes e Off is the factory default setting Off resets the printer to its Energy Paper By r ap factory default settings Paper e The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer Performance may be affected but print quality is not e Energy Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media e Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job Performance may be affected but print quality is not ADF Loaded Beep Specifies whether or not the ADF sounds a beep when paper is Enabled loaded Disabled Note Disabled is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 181 A Menu item Quiet Mode On Run Initial setup Yes No Description Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer Notes e Off is the factory default setting This setting supports the performance specifications for your printer On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible This setting is best suited for printing text and line art For optimal printing of color rich documents set Quiet Mode to Off Selecting Photo from the printer dri
319. r size loaded CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Size setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting e For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints Try one or more of the following Troubleshooting 332 IMIAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE Replace the defective toner cartridge MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective photoconductor unit MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective transfer module CLEAN THE PRINTHEAD LENSES 1 Open the front door and then the internal cover 2 Locate the printhead wipers 3 Gently pull the printhead wiper out until it stops and then slowly slide it back into place 4 Clean the remaining three printhead lenses Paper curl Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setting e For Windows users specify the paper type from
320. r system support person to make sure the network is functioning correctly The printer software is available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com IMIAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB SERIAL OR ETHERNET CABLE For more information visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Troubleshooting 314 M AKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer Confidential and other held jobs do not print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following PARTIAL JOB NO JOB OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data e Delete the print job and then print it again e For PDF documents recreate the PDF and then print it again If you are printing from the Internet then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one e For Windows users open Print Properties From the Print and Hold dialog select the Keep duplicate documents check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number e For Macintosh users save each print job naming each job differently and then send the individual jobs to the printer MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list
321. ration and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems e Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220 C 446 F without releasing hazardous emissions e Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinting introduces semi liquid and volatile components into the printer e Use grain short card stock when possible Printing confidential and other held jobs Storing print jobs in the printer You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs Note Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs Confidential Confidential lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the control panel Note The PIN is set from the computer It must be four digits using the numbers 0 9 Verify Verify lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining copies It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed Reserve Reserve allows the printer to store print jobs for printing at a later time
322. rces d alimentation CA Il s agit la d un probleme majeur d chelle nationale En cons quence il vous est recommand de brancher un parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant a laquelle l quipement est connect Utilisez un parasurtenseur r pondant a des caract ristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifi par le laboratoire d assureurs UL Underwriter s Laboratories un autre laboratoire agr de type NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory ou un organisme de certification agr dans votre r gion ou pays Ceci pr vient tout endommagement de l quipement caus par les orages et autres surtensions lectriques Cet quipement utilise des prises de t l phone CA11A Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions The grant ofa telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom s 111 Emergency Service This equipmen
323. rd the front of the tray e Place letterheads faceup with the header on the left side of the tray e Place letterheads facedown with the header on the right side of the tray for duplex printing 5 Insert the tray Loading the multipurpose feeder The multipurpose feeder can hold several sizes and types of print media such as transparencies labels card stock and envelopes It can be used for single page or manual printing or as an additional tray The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately 100 sheets of 75 g m2 20 Ib paper e 10 envelopes e 75 transparencies The multipurpose feeder accepts paper or specialty media within the following dimensions e Width 89 mm 3 5 in to 229 mm 9 02 in e Length 127 mm 5 in to 1270 mm 50 in Note Maximum width and length can be applied only to short edge feeding Note Do not add or remove paper or specialty media when the printer is printing from the multipurpose feeder or when the printer control panel indicator light is blinking Doing so may cause a jam 1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door Loading paper and specialty media 79 2 For paper or specialty media that is longer than letter size paper gently pull the extension until it is fully extended 3 Flex the sheets of paper or specialty media back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease them Straighten the edges on a level surface Envelopes Tr
324. ree space in flash memory for resources Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted e Delete fonts macros and other data stored in flash memory e Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card Troubleshooting 306 53 Unformatted flash detected Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing e Format the flash memory If the error message remains the flash memory may be defective and require replacing 54 Network x software error Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to continue printing e Turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on e Upgrade flash the network firmware in the printer 54 Serial option x error Try one or more of the following Check that the serial cable is properly connected and is the correct one for the serial port e Check that the serial interface parameters protocol baud parity and data bits are set correctly on the printer and host computer e Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer 54 Standard network software error Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer e Upgrade fl
325. reserresseessereseresseens 119 chengine TMC OUT OUT tile WYpEnsrani a a a a a a E 119 Canceling anr e Mallari ar a e a ANA 120 Understandine e mail COONS nioernsenei aiun A E A S 120 RECIDICHES sturioni E ET EEEE T A E eemetad oaRemmetnteeepaes 120 Jule a EAEI EEA EE AE TE A E EAE E AE PE AAA E E N AEA ET 120 POSS A er EAA hs E A AA EE 120 PIENIN Oene a E O 120 OIE NA Enean a E a a T TE staat seaeiraaninannees 120 RESONO aa A A A cussed oubcamtertuanent 121 COLON aice E A E E te 121 COMEN rests E A RATER E EAEE E 121 Darkies Saa aE E E O A 121 Send AS ere N a a 121 EAE AE o E E R AE A E ET E A A E E T E E ave ued A E E 122 SE AIP OW NOW nienn I E AN A E 122 Advanced OPUO NS anne aa E N E OEY 122 FIXIES T O T A LS Getting the printer ready to TaXin A T AN 123 Prial PAKS CUD aerar e aT E E ONAT T ET AT EAE EA AANA 124 CHOOSING a Tax COMME CH ON sas siae Site sh cenatean aT EA AE EE R ORR 125 CONNECtING toan analog telephone Ne wre sha cee cche ceed bil icey Scena a ea a deeds bd una donee eve atoe denne deveeiens 125 C nnectine to a SUS CC nn ce viccatacneala cleats E oe vioduaeratuttoa tae E E AE O 126 Connecting t a FBX OF ISDN SYSTEMI oreren seen aaa ee cece A aes ean 126 Connectie TOrd distinctive ring SEVICE reren ante iil cated a tase an shai ala erie a la a ol als ls a a tae 127 Connecting to an adapter for your country OF region ccccesccccesececeeccceeceteseceusseccenecececeeseceseusetsueneeeesegaess 127 Setting the outgoi
326. rforations cutouts or embossing Have metal clasps string ties or folding bars Have an interlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position Have bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes Note A combination of high humidity over 60 and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes Tips on using labels Notes e Single sided paper labels designed for laser LED printers are supported for occasional use e t is recommended to print no more than 20 pages of paper labels a month e Vinyl pharmacy and dual sided labels are not supported For detailed information on label printing characteristics and design see the Card Stock amp Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com When printing on labels Use labels designed specifically for laser LED printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that The labels can withstand temperatures up to 210 C 410 F without sealing excessive curling wrinkling or releasing hazardous emissions Note Labels can be printed at a higher fusing temperature up to 220 C 428 F if Label Weight is set to Heavy Select this setting using the Embedded Web Server or from the printer control panel Paper menu Label adhesives face sheet printable stock and topco
327. rinter control panel Note This button appears only when the printer is locked The printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while this appears Cancel Jobs Open the Cancel Jobs screen The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings Print Fax and Network The following options are available under the Print Fax and Network headings e Print job e Copy job e Fax profile e FIP e E mail send Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only three jobs per screen If more than three jobs exist in a column then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs Change Language Launch the Change Language pop up window that lets you change the primary language of the printer Understanding the home screen 25 Features Feature Menu trail line Description A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen This feature shows the Sample Menus gt Settings gt Copy path taken to arrive at the current menu Settings gt Number of Copies Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen If you touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is set and saved then the selection is not saved and it does not become the default setting If an attendance message affects a function then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks
328. rinter hard drive is installed Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts Note On is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 193 Menu item Description Auto Center On Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast Best for content 0 5 Mirror Image On Negative Image On Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Scan edge to edge On Sharpness 1 5 Temperature 4 to 4 Sample Copy On Lets you automatically center the content on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Enables an equal balance of colors in the output Specifies which color to drop during copies and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes e None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout e 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Specifies the contrast used for the copy job Note Best for content is the factory default setting Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory d
329. rk Mode setting if you are using an access point wireless router Select the type of security you want to use to protect your wireless network Enter the security information necessary for the printer to connect to the wireless network Click Submit O uu fF W N FE Open the AirPort application on your computer In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Network gt AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Internet Connect gt AirPort 7 From the Network pop up menu select the name of your wireless network Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly To print on a network printer each Macintosh user must install a custom printer driver file and create a print queue in the Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 1 Install a printer driver file on the computer a Insert the Software and Documentation CD and then double click the installer package for the printer b Follow the instructions on the computer screen c Select a destination and then click Continue d From the Easy Install screen click Install e Type the user password and then click OK All necessary applications are installed in the computer f Click Close when installation is complete 2 Add the printer a For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax 2 Click
330. roblem then contact customer support You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement Characters have jagged or uneven edges If you are using downloaded fonts verify that the fonts are supported by the printer the host computer and the software program Clipped images Try one or more of the following CHECK THE GUIDES Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Size setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting e For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties e For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages You may notice fine horizontal lines in photographs or pages with a high concentration of color This can occur when the printer is in Quiet Mode To fix this set Quiet Mode to Off Image Photo Troubleshooting 330 Shadow images appear on prints Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setti
331. rograms and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union We encourage the recycling of our products If you have further questions about recycling options visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com for your local sales office phone number Static sensitivity notice This symbol identifies static sensitive parts Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer ENERGY STAR Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark ENERGY STAR Notices 349 Temperature information 15 6 to 32 2 C 60 to 90 F Shipping and storage temperature 40 C to 40 C 104 Fahrenheit and 0 C to 35 C 95 Fahrenheit Power consumption Product power consumption The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product Note Some modes may not apply to your product Printing The product is generating hard copy output from 675 W x950de 710 W x952de and x952dte electronic inputs 750 W x954de and x954dhe Copy The product is generating hard copy output from 810 W x950de 830 W x952de and x952dte hard copy original documents 850 W x954de and x954dhe Scan The product is scanning hard copy documents 125 W x950de 130 W x952de and x952dte 135 W
332. rom your premises for service e The printer is being sold to another organization Disposing of a hard drive Note Not all printers have a hard disk installed In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to ensure that confidential data stored on the printer hard disk cannot be accessed once the printer or its hard disk is removed from your premises While most data can be erased electronically you may want to consider one or more of the following actions before disposing of a printer or hard disk e Degaussing Flushes the hard drive with a magnetic field that erases stored data e Crushing Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable e Milling Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits Note While most data can be erased electronically the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each memory device on which data could have been stored Erasing volatile memory The volatile memory RAM installed on your printer requires a power source to retain information To erase the buffered data simply power down the device Securing the hard disk and other installed memory 236 Erasing non volatile memory e Individual settings device and network settings security settings and embedded solutions Erase information and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu e Fax data Eras
333. rt settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions POft sessesscesscecsrrscerersrn 62 SELUN GUO er OMENS areae aaa e er O E NE OT 64 Minimizing your printer s environmental iMpact ccccccscscscssesesseseeeess00 SAVING paper and TONE isap A a TE E AA TERRA 66 USING reevcled Paner ien a A a E ON 66 CONSENS SADDI S taen a T E E a A 66 SVINE CAOT OV a T A tas Saw dine E E OU wrote ec eaatareme neiaSuecaeelauaaeaa 67 Usine ECO MOE inaona a a a a a te stale E dakunlesahdspeniines 67 Reducing PIME NOE aaae dt a a E N AA 67 Adiustines Sleen Mode arnser N E i 68 Usine Hibernate Mod Eninnene n a a a a A 69 AGJUSTING the priehtness of TNE GISPIAY iecaietupaccursedivwedesndetiivetieusereanarneh E E E T EASA 69 RECVEIIE aaen AN EE O EENT E O T R 70 Recycling Lexmark ProdUCtS mnariana aaa a E T A Oe 70 Recycling Lexmark PACKAGING mesnr a E 70 Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling ssssesssssssssresserrrssrrresserosssssssrersrereeseresssessseresrressseessee 70 Loading paper and specialty MeIa cccscscscscscscscscscscscscscscscscscscecccssssee dL Seting the paper sizeand LY DC nenei a tons eda a EE E e aie ae emaueencssaits 71 Conngornne Universal paper SOUL OS assis so ean crests a E E T N 71 Loading the standard or optional 520 sheet tray ccccceeccsecesscceeseceeeceecececeesueeeeceeseceeeceeneeesetseeeeeeeees 72 Loading the optional 850 and 1 150 sSheet trayS cccccccccsecccsseceececse
334. s a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Enables the use of the cc and bcc fields Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 209 FTP Settings menu Menu item Description Format PDF pdf Secure PDF pdf TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps PDF Version 1 2 1 6 A 1a Content Type Text Photo Photo Text Graphics Content Source Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Black and White Laser Resolution 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi 75 dpi Darkness 1 9 Orientation Portrait Landscape Specifies the format of the FTP file Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Specifies the content of the ori
335. s from the printer before moving it e Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time Note Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty Moving the printer to another location The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions e Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer Any cart used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options Keep the printer in an upright position e Avoid severe jarring movements Shipping the printer When shipping the printer use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit Maintaining the printer 270 Administrative support Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server For more advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Checking the status of the printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you
336. s from the printer before moving it e Lift the printer off the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time Note Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer This product uses a printing process that heats the print media and the heat may cause the media to release emissions You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce risk of fire use only the telecommunications RJ 11 cord provided with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer AN CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Make sure that all external connections such as Ethernet and telephone system connections are properly installed in their marked plug in ports This product is designed tested and
337. s in the same stack Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus Store paper per manufacturer recommendations Understanding jam numbers and locations When a jam occurs a message indicating the jam location appears on the printer display Open doors and covers and remove trays to access jam locations To resolve any paper jam message you must clear all jammed paper from the paper path Clearing jams 273 Area Area name Jam numbers What to do 4yy xx Open cover F and then remove jammed paper transport 455 Open door G and H and then remove the jammed paper 2 Standard finisher bin Open staple door remove the staple cartridge and then remove the jammed 3 Dore a a oon 5 Finisher bin 1 Finisher bin 2 7 Door C Open door C and then remove the jammed paper Trays 1 4 Open each tray and then remove the jammed paper Multipurpose feeder Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder and then remove the jammed paper Standard exit bin 201 202 Remove all paper from the standard exit bin and then remove the jammed 20 paper 10 Automatic Document 28y xx Remove all paper from the ADF and then remove the jammed paper Feeder ADF 11 Tray 5 high capacity Open the tray and then remove the jammed paper feeder Open the top cover and then remove the jammed paper Gently move the tray to the left until it stops and then remove the jammed paper
338. s incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 3 Touch Submit Scanning to an FTP address Scanning to an FTP address using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt FTP gt type the FTP address gt Send It Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press and then enter the FTP shortcut number 4 Touch Send It Scanning to an FTP address using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF
339. s menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed Understanding printer menus 147 Settings General Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings E mail Settings FTP Settings Flash Drive Menu Print Settings Manage Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Copy Shortcuts Profile Shortcuts Supplies menu Menu item Description Replace Supply Provides the option to reset the supply counter for the Separator Roll and Pick Assembly separator roll and pick assembly Yes e Select Yes to reset the supply counter No e Select No to exit Cyan Cartridge Shows the status of the cyan toner cartridge Cartridge Nearly Low Cartridge Low Cartridge Very Low Cartridge Critically Low Invalid Replace Missing or Defective OK Unsupported Magenta Cartridge Shows the status of the magenta toner cartridge Cartridge Nearly Low Cartridge Low Cartridge Very Low Cartridge Critically Low Invalid Replace Missing or Defective OK Unsupported Yellow Cartridge Shows the status of the yellow toner cartridge Cartridge Nearly Low Cartridge Low Cartridge Very Low Cartridge Critically Low Invalid Replace Missing or Defective OK Unsupported Understanding printer menus 148 A Menu item Black Cartridge Cartridge Nearly Low Cartridge Low Cartridge Very Low Cartridge Critically Low Invalid Replace Missing or Defective OK Unsupported Cyan Photoconductor Unit Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Ma
340. s network The Wireless menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt Wireless Menu item Wi Fi Protected Setup Start Push Button Wi Fi Protected Setup Start PIN Method Enable Disable WPS Autodetection Enable Disable Network Mode Infrastructure Ad hoc Compatibility 802 11b g 802 11b g n Choose Network list of available networks View Signal Quality View Security Mode Description Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by pressing buttons on both the printer and the access point wireless router within a given period of time Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by using a PIN on the printer and entering it into the wireless settings of the access point Automatically detects the connection method that an access point with WPS uses WPS Push Button Configuration PBC or WPS Personal Identification Number PIN Note Disable is the factory default setting Specifies the network mode Notes e Ad hoc is the factory default setting This configures wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer Infrastructure lets the printer access a network using an access point Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network Note The 802 11b g n is the factory default setting Lets you select an available network for the printer to use Lets you view the
341. same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the print job continues using the linked tray Understanding printer menus 150 Paper Size Type menu Menu item Description Tray x Size Letter Legal Executive JIS B4 A3 11x17 Oficio M xico Folio Statement Universal A4 A5 A6 Tray x Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type x Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray Notes e Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting e For trays with automatic size sensing only the size detected by the hardware appears e Ifthe same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the print job uses the linked tray Specifies the paper type loaded in each tray Notes e Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1 Custom Type x is the factory default setting for all other trays e If available then a user defined name will appear instead of Custom Type x e Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Understand
342. scards any data received through the USB port e Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled 58 Too many disks installed 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the excess disks 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Troubleshooting 308 58 Too many flash options installed 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the excess flash memory 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many trays attached 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the additional trays 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 59 Incompatible tray x Try one or more of the following e Remove the specified tray e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray 61 Remove defective disk Try one or more of the following e Remove the defective printer hard disk Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk 62 Disk full Try one or more of the following e Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing e Delete fonts macros and other data stored on the printer hard disk Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity 63 Unformatted dis
343. serossssessseressreresssrereseeresseees 103 Pining IMTOMMMATIO MN page neniun E TA E sah eaaeeieoe 103 Protine d tonte ample liS Teeraa A EE TE TEE 103 Prnungea directory ISE aranan n a Rie iia ee AONA a O 104 canceling ai PriNt JOD ssarencciicucuctadesatannactwagaedeweaan cena eee 104 Canceling a print job from the printer control panel essesssssssssreersrerssserssssesssrersrsrrreseeesssresssresserreeessseesss 104 Canceling a print job from the COMPUTER icase T a 104 Contents 4 CODV ING vnuccrecicceccnscicdcennsnenccenaenccccunsencesstuncncuestuneereOvaeasatvevieweeteowasrseteereeecte OD MaKe CODIO eener erra E E AAE E E E 105 Makine Tauck CODY searr E r a N A 105 COPVINE USING tMeEAD Prarie A Aaa aa a O A A 105 COPYING USING ING scanner Blas S anasa aaa E T A ana aNeeOa 106 COPYING IIM PNOO Srina ar A E T E TOA 106 COpyNE ONS DECIAI EY Medidores EE E T seed eeeeeeieeatee 106 COpyVing on transparencies aspermia EE EEA E EAE E A EENE EEEE A EE 106 CONVINE OM GRl Sl CAG arrena n N A ET EE NN EE EO 106 CUSTOMIZING CODY SEUN anioni E E a a 107 COPYING TO dder nNtSI Z Ea a a N 107 Making copies using paper from a selected tray ccccsssseccesseecceeseccceeseeceeesecesseuscessuaceseuaeessuaeeeseeasessagseess 107 CODVINE difterent paper SIZOS asiaa a A O A ieee 108 Copying on both sides of the paper duplexing sessssenrsssesersssseerssssrrerssssressseresssssssenssssressssseesssserseeerrsees 108 Reducing or enl
344. sers a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper 3 Click OK b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the Print dialog and pop up menus adjust the settings as needed Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper or select the appropriate tray or feeder 3 Click Print Printing in black and white From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Print Mode gt Black Only gt Submit Adjusting toner darkness 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Printing 96 If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can e View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu e Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Toner Darkness 3 Adjust the toner darkness setting 4 Click Submit Using Max Speed and Max Yield The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield Max Yield is the factory
345. system are not supported gif JPEG or jpg bmp PCx TIFF or tif png Printing 99 Printing on specialty media Tips on using letterhead e Use letterhead designed specifically for laser LED printers e Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities Before loading letterhead flex the sheets to prevent them from sticking together e Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead Standard and optional trays simplex printing Preprinted letterhead When feeding short edge the top design is placed faceup edge of the sheet with the logo is placed at the right side of the tray When feeding long edge the letter head should go to the rear of the printer Standard and optional trays duplex printing Preprinted letterhead The top edge of the sheet withthe design is placed facedown logo is placed at the right side of the tray Multipurpose feeder simplex printing Preprinted letterhead The top edge of the sheet withthe design is placed facedown logo should enter the multipurpose feeder first Multipurpose feeder duplex printing Preprinted letterhead The top edge of the sheet withthe design is placed faceup logo should enter the multipurpose feeder last Note Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser LED printers Tips on using transparencies e Print samples on the transparencies b
346. t sessnssssnesssensssssessrrersreressersssssessseressrrreseressseresssenssssssessseesss 315 Print job takes longer LH ANNCK DOCLEO vensassindssmvacincadsncdwneeiwinnvintendeendeensadiewalionnss arleevadenalevanenad vse tedanesteawvetsntwwnesss 315 Job prints from the wrong tray Or ON the wrong Papel ssseeccsssseccesseeceessecceseascesseesceseeeseeseeecesseeseeeseeeens 316 HVC ORGECE Cll ACCT S prn aaran tas clase atv Go nt accceu Salida erst vaste alta a Ta a TN 316 Tray linkine does NOL WOK sacatvviateowsa onnenn aE une EAEE AAE E EEE Eaa TaS ATREA 316 Contents 12 Laree Jobs do NOE CON AEC nseni ER E A E E 316 Unexpected page breaks OCCU cismin E aE E eee hoc vavoseamaumeniens 317 SOIVINE CODY PrODIEMIS narrer ranra E T E T O 317 Copier does NOUTES DONG naserie A a N ates aetna taetn 317 Scanner UnL does NOLCIOS Eara N OE E E E O AE 317 POOR CODY oual Vaser N E E E AR 317 Partlal dOCuUMent OF NOLO COPIES anan a T ANA 319 SOIVINE scanner DroDIEMS iair aenn T E N 319 CHECKING aM UAFES DONSIVE SCAMMEN mei a a a a a a T 319 Scan Was WHOL SUCCESS Uien a a a aaia 320 Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer sssseessseersseressssssssrrrsreressrrreserresseesssrrrsseressreresssssrereeeee 320 Poor scannedimase dual osrin a a a E A stead Sadatdaiatsuis 320 Parua document OM photo SCANS oein a a a a a a 321 CANO SEAM fronta tTompute eire TE E AE TA E E 321 SOIVIME Ta DroObDlE MS ara A T a T E 321 Faxandesmallkf
347. t Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close door A 4 If necessary touch Continue from the printer control panel 203 paper jam If the jammed paper is visible in the standard exit bin then firmly grasp the paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 276 1 Open door A and then door D by lifting the release latch of each door and lowering the doors AN CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close door D and then close door A 4 If necessary touch Continue from the printer control panel Clearing jams 277 230 paper jam 1 Lower the multipurpose feeder and then open door B 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close door B 4 If necessary touch Continue from the printer control panel 231 paper jam 1 Open door A by lifting the release latch and then lowering the door AN CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching it Cl
348. t a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Manage Shortcuts gt Fax Shortcut Setup Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 3 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then enter the fax number To create a multiple number shortcut enter the fax numbers for the group Note Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon 4 Assign a shortcut number If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 5 Click Add Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Faxing 129 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number To create a group of fax numbers touch Next number and then enter the next fax number 4 Navigate to gt enter a name for the shortcut gt Done gt OK gt Fax It Sending a fax Sending a fax using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note
349. t may not provide for the effective hand over of a call to another device connected to the same line This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers Notices 353 Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom s telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom s specifications e There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation and e The equipment shall go on hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another Using this product in Switzerland This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877 to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland The Lexmark filter must be used as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse Cet appareil n cessite utilisation d un filtre de tonalit de facturation suisse n2 de r f rence Lexmark 14B5109 ou 80
350. t respond These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears Scanner unit does not close Make sure there are no obstructions 1 Lift the scanner unit 2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open 3 Lower the scanner unit Poor copy quality These are some examples of poor copy quality Blank pages e Checkerboard pattern Distorted graphics or pictures e Missing characters e Faded print Troubleshooting 317 e Dark print Skewed lines e Smudges e Streaks e Unexpected characters e White lines in print Try one or more of the following CLEAR ANY ERROR MESSAGES Check the display and clear any error messages REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE When the print remains faded replace the toner or print cartridge CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS The scanner glass may be dirty Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 240 ADJUST THE TONER DARKNESS OF THE COPY Adjust the toner darkness from the Copy menus MMIAKE SURE THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT IS SATISFACTORY Check the quality of the original document PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT PROPERLY Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in
351. tallation 49 ports 35 printer hard disk installing 44 printer hard disk removing 48 tandem tray module installing 50 updating in printer driver 54 options touch screen copy 113 114 115 140 e mail 120 121 122 fax 134 135 FTP 140 141 scan 144 scan to computer 144 145 ordering maintenance kit 249 staple cartridges 248 toner cartridges 247 waste toner bottle 248 ordering photoconductor units 248 output file type changing 119 p paper characteristics 84 different sizes copying 108 finishing features 92 letterhead 85 preprinted forms 85 recycled 86 saving 111 selecting 85 Storing 87 unacceptable 85 86 Universal size setting 71 using recycled 66 paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is cleared 329 paper jams avoiding 273 paper jams clearing 201 202 paper jams 275 203 paper jam 276 230 paper jam 278 231 paper jam 278 24x paper jam 280 250 paper jam 286 281 paper jam 287 28y xx paper jams 296 4yy xx paper jams 289 Paper Loading menu 156 paper size setting 71 Paper Size Type menu 151 paper sizes supported 88 Paper Texture menu 154 paper type setting 71 paper types duplex support 90 supported by printer 90 supported by the finisher 90 where to load 90 Parallel x menu 170 parts checking status 247 checking from printer control panel 247 checking using the Embedded Web Server 247 parts replacing maintenance kit 249 PCL Emul menu 230 PDF menu 229 photoconductor
352. tation Note The icon appears on the printer home screen only when there is a computer registered with the network printer The computer must have either Windows 7 or Windows Vista operating system installed Setting up and using the home screen applications 31 Setting up Remote Operator Panel This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near the network printer From your computer screen you can view the printer status release held print jobs create bookmarks and do other print related tasks you might normally do while standing at the network printer 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF gt Remote Operator Panel 3 Select the Enabled check box and then customize the settings 4 Click Apply To use the application from the Embedded Web Server click Applications gt Remote Operator Panel gt Launch VNC Applet Exporting and importing a configuration You can export configuration settings into a text file and then import it to apply the settings to other printers Exporting a configuration to a file 1 Open a Web browser and then
353. te Collate must be set to On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies If Collate is set to Off then the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job 4 Select one of the following Between Copies Between Jobs e Between Pages Off 5 Touch and then Copy It Copying 110 Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet In order to save paper you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto a single sheet of paper Notes e The Paper Size must be set to Letter Legal A4 or JIS B5 e The Copy Size must be set to 100 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Paper Saver gt select desired output gt 4 gt Copy It Creating a custom copy job job build The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job Each set may be scanned using different job parameters When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters and then it scans the next set
354. ted received and blocked calls Note This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu Copy Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts Prints a report containing information about e mail shortcuts Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts Profiles List Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer Print Directory Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or printer hard disk Notes e Job Buffer Size must be set to 100 e Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed correctly and working Asset Report Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned into an asset database Network Ports menu Active NIC menu Menu item Description Active NIC Notes Auto e Auto is the factory default setting list of available network cards e This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed Standard Network or Network x menus Note Only active ports appear in this menu all inactive ports are omitted Understanding printer menus 162 Menu item Description PCL SmartSw
355. tes Off is the factory default setting On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port Notes e On is the factory default setting e Off disables parallel port negotiation Specifies the parallel port protocol Notes e Fastbytes is the factory default setting It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting e Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems Determines if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the computer Notes e Off is the factory default setting e The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on Determines if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a strobe Note On is the factory default setting Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol e On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Sets the network address information for an e
356. th guide down To lock slide the button up when a length has been selected 4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup Loading paper and specialty media 73 Notes e Place print side facedown for duplex printing e Place pre punched paper with the holes toward the front of the tray e Place letterheads with the header on the left side of the tray e Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray Warning Potential Damage Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage 6 Insert the tray 7 From the printer control panel verify the Paper Size and Paper Type setting for the tray based on the paper you loaded Loading paper and specialty media 74 Loading the optional 850 and 1 150 sheet trays The 850 and 1 150 sheet trays support the same paper sizes and types and require the same process for loading paper CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper drawer or tray separately Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed 1 Pull the tray out Loading paper and specialty media 75 3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 4 L
357. that is not printing Ifthe problem continues then the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact customer support Repeating defects appear on a page Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE The photoconductor unit may be defective if marks occur repeatedly in only one color and multiple times on a page Replace the photoconductor unit if the defects occur every 94 2 mm 3 71 in or 37 68 mm 1 48 in Troubleshooting 336 IMIAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE The fuser may be defective if the marks occur down repeatedly in all colors e Replace the fuser if the defects occur every 141 mm 5 55 in Skewed print Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Adjust the length and width guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded e Make sure the guides are not too far from the paper stack e Make sure the guides are not pressing too lightly against the paper stack CHECK THE PAPER Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications IMIAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS CLEAN OR IS NOT CONTAMINATED WITH PAPER DUST Clean the exterior of the printer 1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet Warning Potential Damage To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to t
358. the Embedded Web Server the log can be downloaded to a computer Specifies whether audit logs are deleted Note Yes is the factory default setting Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created Note Factory default settings enable the security audit log Description Current Date and Time Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer Manually Set Date and Time Note Date Time is set in YYYY MM DD HH MM SS format Note GMT is the factory default setting Automatically Observe DST Note On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting Understanding printer menus 179 Menu item Description Custom Time Zone Setup Enables the user to set up the time zone DST Start Week DST Start DayOff DST Start Month DST Start Time DST End Week DST End Day DST End Month DST End Time DST Offset Enable NTP Enables Network Time Protocol which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network Note On is the factory default setting NTP Server Lets you view the NTP Server Address Enable Authentication Lets you change the authentication setting to on or off Note Off is the factory default setting On Understanding printer menus 180 Settings menu General Settings menu Menu item Description Display Language Sets the language of the text appearing on the display English Note All languages may not be available fo
359. the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Advanced Options Touching this button opens a screen where you can change the following settings e Advanced Imaging Use to adjust the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you e mail the document Custom Job Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job e Edge Erase Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan e Transmission Log Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log E mailing 122 Faxing Note The fax function is available only in select printer models Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Getting the printer ready to fax The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions Note During the initial printer setup deselect Fax and any other functi
360. the original document Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image e PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com e Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access e TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG e JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs e XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer E mailing 121 Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding e Sides Duplex Specifies if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e mail e Orientation Specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes Sides and Binding to match the orientation e Binding Specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scan Preview This option displays
361. the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to custom string Try one or more of the following Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray e Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Troubleshooting 297 Change paper source to custom string load orientation Try one or more of the following e Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray e Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue e Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to paper size Try one or more of the following e Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray e Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue e Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to paper size load orientation Try one or more of the following
362. the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears Once the job is canceled the copy screen appears Copying 112 Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed 1 From the home screen touch Cancel Job or press X on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs Understanding the copy screens and options Copy from This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size of the original document e Touch a paper size that matches the original document e Touch Mixed Sizes to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width Touch Auto Size Sense to allow the scanner to automatically determine the size of the original document Copy to This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded e Ifthe settings for Copy from and Copy to are different then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference e If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays then touch Manual Feeder and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder e When Copy to is set to Auto Size Match each copy matches the paper size of the original document If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper
363. through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to Off Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then process it appropriately e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding printer menus 168 Menu item Description USB Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Disabled Job Buffering Mac Binary PS Auto ENA Address YYY YYY YYY YYY ENA Netmask YYY YYY YYY
364. tion from embedded solutions and user data The types of memory along with the types of data stored by each are described below e Volatile memory Your device utilizes standard Random Access Memory RAM to temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy jobs e Non volatile memory Your device may utilize two forms of non volatile memory EEPROM and NAND flash memory Both types are used to store the operating system device settings network information scanner and bookmark settings and embedded solutions e Hard disk memory Some devices have a hard disk drive installed The printer hard disk is designed for device specific functionality and cannot be used for long term storage for data that is not print related The hard disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information create folders create disk or network file shares or FTP information directly from a client device The hard disk can retain buffered user data from complex scan print copy and fax jobs as well as form data and font data There are several circumstances under which you might wish to erase the contents of the memory devices installed in your printer A partial list includes The printer is being decommissioned e The printer hard drive is being replaced e The printer is being moved to a different department or location e The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization e The printer is being removed f
365. tion Lets you add or remove icons and buttons that appear on the home Change Language screen Copy Available selections for each button are Copy Shortcuts Display Fax Do Not Display Fax Shortcuts E mail E mail Shortcuts FTP FTP Shortcuts Search Held Jobs Held Jobs USB Drive Profiles and Solutions Bookmarks Jobs by user Forms and Favorites Date Format Formats the printer date MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD Time Format Formats the printer time 12 hour A M P M 24 hour clock Screen Brightness Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel screen 20 100 Understanding printer menus 185 A Menu item One Page Copy Output Lighting Standard Bin LED Normal Standby Mode Bright Dim Off Power Saver Bright Dim Off Output Option Bin LEDs Normal Standby Mode Bright Dim Off Power Saver Bright Dim Audio Feedback Button Feedback Volume 1 10 Description Sets copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time Note Off is the factory default setting Sets the amount of light from the standard bin or an optional exit bin Notes e In Normal Standby Mode the factory default setting is Bright e In Power Saver Mode the factory default is Dim Sets the audio volume for the buttons Notes e On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback e 5 is the factory default setting for Volume Provides touch screen sensation feedback Note On is the factory defau
366. tional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board 1 Access the system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 36 Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 2 Unpack the memory card Note Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card Additional printer setup 37 3 On the system board open the memory card connector latches N 4 Align the notch on the memory card to the ridge on the connector Additional printer setup 38 5 Push the memory card into the connector until it clicks into place K Installing a flash memory or firmware card The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card Only one of each may be installed but the connectors are interchangeable AN CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board For more informati
367. to memory 1 On the home screen touch Cancel Jobs The Cancel Jobs screen appears 2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel Only three jobs appear on the screen touch the down arrow until the job you want appears and then touch the job you want to cancel 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears the selected jobs are deleted and then the home screen appears Understanding fax options Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics e Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos e Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer e Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film e Magazine Use when the original document is from a
368. touch Copy From the Sides Duplex area touch the button for your preferred duplexing method The first number represents sides of the original documents the second number represents sides of the copy For example select 1 sided to 2 sided if you have 1 sided original documents and you want 2 sided copies 5 Touch and then Copy It Copying 108 Reducing or enlarging copies Copies can be reduced to 25 of the original document size or enlarged to 400 of the original document size The factory default setting for Scale is Auto If you leave Scale set to Auto the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying To reduce or enlarge a copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 From the Scale area touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies Touching Copy to or Copy from after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto 5 Touch Copy It Adjusting copy quality 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards ph
369. touch Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add 4 Touch Send It Sending an e mail using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Ifyou are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient s gt gt enter the name of recipient gt Browse shortcuts E mailing 118 4 Touch the name of the recipients To enter additional recipients touch Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add or search the address book 5 Touch Done Customizing e mail settings Adding e mail subject and message information 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides From the home screen touch E mail Type an e mail address Touch Options gt Subject Type the e mail subject Touch Done gt Message Type an e mail message O on nd UU A W N Touch D
370. tridge low 312 Adjusting color 297 Bin 2 is unable to lower 297 Change paper source to custom string 297 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 298 Change paper source to custom type name 297 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 297 Change paper source to paper size 298 Change paper source to paper size paper type 298 Change paper source to paper size paper type load orientation 298 Change paper source to paper size load orientation 298 Check src orientation or guides 299 Close cover x 299 Close door x 299 Disk corrupted 299 Empty the hole punch box 299 Error reading USB hub Remove hub 299 Fax memory full 299 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 300 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 300 Fax Station Name not set up 300 Fax Station Number not set up 300 Insert hole punch box 300 Insert Tray x 300 Install Tray x 300 Load src with custom string 301 Load src with custom type name 301 Load src with size 301 Load src with type size 301 Load Manual Feeder with custom string 302 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name 302 Load Manual Feeder with paper size 302 Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper size 302 Load staples 302 Manual feeder expects paper size Check paper source guides 303 Memory full cannot print fa
371. ttings for your paper e Units of Measure e Portrait Width e Portrait Height Notes e The largest supported Universal size is 296 9 x 431 8 mm 11 69 x 17 in e The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 in and is loaded only in the multipurpose feeder 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Universal Setup gt Units of Measure gt select a unit of measure 2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height 3 Select the width or height and then touch Submit Loading paper and specialty media 71 Loading the standard or optional 520 sheet tray The printer has one standard 520 sheet tray Tray 1 and may have one or more optional 520 sheet trays All 520 sheet trays support the same paper sizes and types A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper drawer or tray separately Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed 1 Pull the tray out R SQ R Q R a ay Q AI Notice the size indicators at the bottom of the tray Use these indicators to help position the length and width guides Loading paper and specialty media 72 2 Squeeze and then slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size loaded 3 Squeeze and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size loaded Note The length guide has a locking device To unlock slide the button on top of the leng
372. type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Click Settings or Configuration Click Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF or click Embedded Solutions From Installed Solutions click the name of the application you want to configure Click Configure gt Export O uu A W N Follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file and then type a unique file name or use the default name Note Ifa JVM Out of Memory error occurs then repeat the export process until the configuration file is saved Importing a configuration from a file 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings or Configuration 3 Click Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF or click Embedded Solutions 4 From Installed Solutions click the name of the application you want to configure Setting up and using the home screen applications 32 5 Click Configure gt Import 6 Browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer and then load or preview it Note If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears
373. u These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1 Serial Option 2 or Serial Option 3 menus 138200 172800 230400 345600 1200 2400 4800 Data Bits Specifies the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame Note 8 is the factory default setting Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames Note None is the factory default setting Honor DSR Determines whether the printer uses the DSR Signal Notes On e Off is the factory default setting e DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing SMTP Setup menu Menu item Description Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server gateway and port information Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port SMTP Timeout Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to 5 30 send an e mail Note 30 seconds is the factory default setting Reply Address Specifies a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e mail sent by the printer Understanding printer menus 174 A Menu item Use SSL Disabled Negotiate Required SMTP Server Authentication No authentication required Login Plain CRAM MD5 Digest MD5 NTLM Kerberos 5 Device Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Cr
374. uce their impact on the environment We design with the environment in mind engineer our packaging to reduce materials and provide collection and recycling programs For more information see e The Notices chapter e The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment e The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle By selecting certain printer settings or tasks you may be able to reduce your printer s impact even further This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit Saving paper and toner Studies show that as much as 80 of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper To save paper and energy using one printer setting use Eco Mode Using recycled paper As an environmentally conscious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser LED printers For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer see Using recycled paper and other office papers on page 86 Conserving supplies Use both sides of the paper If your printer model supports duplex printing you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the pap
375. ul in providing space to bind or hole punch copies Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want If the additional margin is too large then the copy will be cropped e Overlay Use to create a watermark or message that overlays the content of your copy You can choose from Urgent Confidential Copy and Draft or you can enter a custom message in the Enter custom text field The word you pick will appear faintly in large print across each page Note A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person When a custom overlay is created a button with an icon of that overlay will be available e Paper Saver Use to print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page Paper Saver is also called N up printing The N stands for Number For example 2 up would print two pages of your document on a single page and 4 up would print four pages of your document on a single page Touching Print Page Borders adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page e Separator Sheets Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies pages or print jobs The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on Save As Shortcut This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut by assigning a number Copying 115 E mailing Sca
376. ult setting e This menu applies to all scan functions Specifies whether the transmission log prints Note Print log is the factory default setting Specifies a paper source when printing FTP logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Specifies an exit bin for FTP logs Notes e Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Lets you enter a base file name Note The limitation is 53 characters Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job Note Off is the factory default setting Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses Note On is the factory default setting Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Enables an equal balance of colors in the output Understanding printer menus 212 Menu item Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Contrast 0 5 Best for content Mirror Image On Negative Image On Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Scan edge to edge
377. unit replacing 249 photoconductor units ordering 248 photos copying 106 placing separator sheets between copies 110 port Ethernet 52 Fax 52 Telephone 52 USB 52 port settings configuring 62 PostScript menu 229 Power off wait 2 seconds power on 303 print job canceling from computer 104 print quality cleaning the scanner glass 240 replacing a photoconductor unit 249 print quality troubleshooting black streaks on a page 338 blank pages 336 characters have jagged edges 330 Index 366 clipped images 330 fine horizontal lines 330 gray background 331 light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 332 poor transparency quality 342 print irregularities 333 print is too dark 334 print is too light 335 repeating defects appear ona page 336 shadow images appear on prints 331 skewed print 337 solid color pages 338 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 339 streaked vertical lines on prints 340 toner fog or background shading on the page 340 toner rubs off 341 toner specks 342 white streaks on a page 338 print quality troubleshooting cleaning the printhead lenses 241 print troubleshooting error reading flash drive 314 held jobs do not print 315 incorrect characters print 316 incorrect margins 332 jammed pages are not reprinted 329 job prints from wrong tray 316 job prints on wrong paper 316 jobs do not print 314 Large jobs do not collate 316 multiple language PDF files do not pri
378. unt of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and USB buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing This menu only appears if a formatted disk is installed Notes Off is the factory default setting On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding printer menus 163 A Menu item Description Mac Binary PS Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Auto Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Standard Network Setup Displays and sets the printer network settings Reports Note The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless Network Card network TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk Network x Setup Reports Network Card TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk
379. urce Cancel the print job Load src with type size Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder e Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it feeds from the default paper source Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 301 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the manual feeder Touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing e Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with custom string Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the manual feeder Touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing e Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with paper size Try one or more of the following e Load the specified paper in the manual feeder Touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing e Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in
380. ve printer hard disk is installed Understanding printer menus 177 Menu item Description Wiping Mode Auto Manual Off Scheduled Wiping Time Day Manual Wiping Do not start now Start now Automatic Method Single pass Multiple pass Manual Method Single pass Multiple pass Scheduled Method Single pass Multiple pass Specifies the mode for disk wiping Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer determines when to initiate a disk wipe Sets the schedule for disk wiping Notes Time is used to set the time for scheduled wiping Day is used to set the specific day or period for scheduled wiping Values are Sunday to Friday Everyday Weekdays and Weekends Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or confirmation message Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without first having to wipe it Overwrites all disk space that has been used to hold data from a print job that has been processed printed This type of wipe does not erase any information related to an unprocessed print job Notes e Do not start now is the factory default setting e If the Disk Wiping access control is activated then a user must successfully authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk wipe Marks all disk space used by a previous print job and does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has
381. ver may disable Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard Notes e Yes is the factory default setting e After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the Country select screen the default becomes No Understanding printer menus 182 A Menu item Description Keyboard Specifies a language and custom key information for the printer Keyboard Type control panel keyboard The additional tabs enable access to accent English marks and symbols from the printer control panel keyboard Francais Francais Canadien Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Suomi Portuguese Russian Polski Swiss German Swiss French Turkce Korean Custom Key x Accents Symbols Tab On Russian Polish Tab On Korean Tab Paper Sizes Specifies the default paper measurement US Metric Notes e Initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard e Changing this setting also changes the default for each input source in the Paper Size Paper Type menu Scan to PC Port Range Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking port range firewall The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers separated by a semicolon Note 9751 12000 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 183 A Menu item Description Displayed Information Specifies what is
382. wing Touch Continue to clear the message e Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer If the message appears again then contact your system support person Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator The printer is in Fax Server mode but the Fax Server setup has not been completed Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Fax Server setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Fax Station Name not set up The Fax Station Name has not been entered Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Fax Station Number not set up The Fax Station Number has not been entered Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message e Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Insert Tray x Insert the specified tray into the printer Insert the hole punch box Insert the hole punch box into the finisher and then touch Continue to clear the message Install Tray x Try one or more of the following e Install the specified tray 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug t
383. with the same or different parameters The definition of a set depends on the scan source e f you scan a document on the scanner glass then a set consists of one page e f you scan multiple pages using the ADF then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty e If you scan one page using the ADF then a set consists of one page For example 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Options gt Custom Job gt On gt Done gt Copy It When the end of a set is reached the scan screen appears 4 Load the next document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed Note If required change the job settings 5 Ifyou have another document to scan then repeat the previous step Otherwise touch Finish the job Copying 111 Placing information on copies Placing the date and time at the top of each page 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparenci
384. workmanship If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement at Lexmark s option If this product is a feature or option this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended To obtain warranty service you may be required to present the feature or option with the product If you transfer this product to another user warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user Limited warranty service The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it or its original contents are substantially used up depleted or consumed To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location You are responsible for loss of or damage to a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location Notices 358 When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part the item replaced
385. x954de and x954dhe Ready The product is waiting for a print job 110 W x950de 115 W x952de and x952dte 120 W x954de and x954dhe f Of he product is plugged into a wall outlet but the power 0 35 W switch is turned off The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time averaged measurements Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average Sleep Mode The product is in a high level energy saving mode Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Power Saver This product is designed with an energy saving mode called Power Saver The Power Saver Mode is equivalent to the Sleep Mode The Power Saver Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity The Power Saver Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time called the Power Saver Timeout Factory default Power Saver Timeout for this product in minutes By using the configuration menus the Power Saver Timeout can be modified between 2 minutes and 240 minutes Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption but may increase the response time of the product Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response but uses more energy Notices 350 Off mode If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power then to completely stop product power
386. xes 303 Power off wait 2 seconds power on 303 Remove paper from linked set bin name 303 Remove paper from all bins 303 Remove paper from bin x 303 Remove paper from standard output bin 303 Restore held jobs 303 Scan Document Too Long 304 Scanner ADF Cover Open 304 SMTP server not set up Contact system administrator 304 Some held jobs were not restored 304 Unsupported disk 304 Unsupported USB device please remove 299 Unsupported USB hub please remove 299 printer options troubleshooting 2 000 sheet drawer problems 327 cannot detect flash memory card 328 cannot detect printer hard disk 328 internal print server 328 Internal Solutions Port 328 memory card 327 option does not work 326 paper tray problems 327 USB parallel interface card 328 printer problems solving basic 313 printer software installing 54 printhead lenses cleaning 241 printing black and white 96 canceling from printer control panel 104 directory list 104 font sample list 103 from flash drive 98 from Macintosh 96 from Windows 96 max speed and max yield 97 menu settings page 53 network setup page 54 printing a directory list 104 printing a document 96 printing a font sample list 103 printing a menu settings page 53 printing a network setup page 54 printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer 103 from Windows 103 printing from a flash drive 98 printing in black and white 96 publicat
387. xmark com General sustainability related information can be found at the Environmental Sustainability link Storing paper Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality For best results store paper where the temperature is 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24 C 65 to 75 F with relative humidity between 40 and 60 Store paper in cartons when possible on a pallet or shelf rather than on the floor Store individual packages on a flat surface Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages Paper and specialty media guidelines 87 Supported paper sizes types and weights The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper input sources and the types of paper they support Note To use a paper size that is unlisted configure a Universal Paper Size Supported paper sizes Manual envelope Manual aper Paper size and dimension MP feeder 7 A4 210 x297 mm 8 27 x 11 7 in 26 A5 148 x210 mm 5 83 x 8 27 in A6 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 83 in B l B E lt lt JIS B5 182 x257 mm 7 17 x 10 1 in J9 o amp 1 3 5 Letter 216 x279 mm 8 5 x 11 in i ron Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in fone Je 4 6 amp 1 5 6 3 5 Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 25 x 10 5 in JIS B4
388. xternal print server Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Sets the netmask information for an external print server Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Understanding printer menus 171 A Menu item ENA gateway YYY YYY YYY YYY Serial x menu PS SmartSwitch NPA Mode Auto Description Sets the gateway information for an external print server Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Description Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default
389. y certifications such as the Forestry Stewardship Council FSC or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification PEFC These certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices 3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs normal 75 or 80 g m certified paper lower weight paper or recycled paper Paper and specialty media guidelines 86 Unacceptable paper examples Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless papers Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the paper Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser Preprinted papers that require a registration the precise location on the page greater than 2 3 mm 0 9 in such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms Coated papers erasable bond synthetic papers thermal papers Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers Recycled papers that fail EN12281 2002 European testing Paper weighing less than 60 g m 16 Ib Multiple part forms or documents For more information about Lexmark visit www le

Lexmark X952de

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents